1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes true
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
160 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
161 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
162 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
163 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
164 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
168 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
169 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
170 \author 258250489 "eugen"
171 \author 274215730 "scott"
172 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
173 \author 1064312605 "Udi Fogiel"
174 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
175 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
186 by the \SpecialChar LyX
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
193 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
194 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
195 Documentation mailing list:
197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
199 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
211 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 \begin_inset Newline newline
219 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
221 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
225 \begin_inset Note Note
228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
229 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
230 \begin_inset Newline newline
235 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
243 \begin_layout Standard
244 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
245 LatexCommand tableofcontents
252 \begin_layout Chapter
256 \begin_layout Section
257 What is \SpecialChar LyX
261 \begin_layout Standard
263 is a document preparation system.
264 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
267 business letters and proposals,
269 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
273 It is unlike most other
274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
281 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
282 That means that when you type a section header,
284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
313 takes care of the typesetting for you;
314 so you deal only with concepts,
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
324 If you haven't read it yet,
330 \begin_layout Standard
335 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
338 the format of all of the manuals.
339 If you don't read it,
340 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
341 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
344 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 Like most applications,
352 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
353 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
354 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
359 This is not a bug or an oversight,
361 When you read a book,
362 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
363 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
364 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
369 The first case is large images.
370 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
371 left click on the image and use the option
382 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
384 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
387 \begin_layout Standard
388 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
389 menus and toolbar buttons,
390 have a look at Appendix
395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
397 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
405 \begin_layout Section
409 \begin_layout Standard
410 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
412 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
414 Just select the manual you want to read from the
421 \begin_layout Section
422 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
426 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
433 \begin_layout Standard
434 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
435 can be configured via the menu
437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
441 \begin_inset Index idx
446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
453 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
456 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
457 packages are available.
458 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
459 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
460 was installed on your system,
461 you might have some items that you installed locally,
463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
467 \begin_inset space \space{}
470 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
474 To force \SpecialChar LyX
475 to re-inspect your system use
477 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
481 \begin_inset Index idx
486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
487 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
493 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
494 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
497 \begin_layout Section
500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
502 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
509 \begin_layout Standard
510 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
511 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
512 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs
513 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
514 or print your documents
518 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
519 Some \SpecialChar LyX
520 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
529 which can produce PDFs and the like.
532 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
537 every \SpecialChar LyX
538 document can still be output as plain text
539 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
546 \begin_layout Standard
547 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
549 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
553 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
554 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
557 \begin_layout Standard
558 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
559 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
560 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
562 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
570 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
573 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
577 \begin_inset Index idx
582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
583 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
591 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
598 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
602 \begin_layout Chapter
603 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
607 \begin_layout Section
608 Basic File Operations
609 \begin_inset Index idx
614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
623 \begin_layout Standard
628 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
631 \begin_layout Itemize
654 \begin_layout Itemize
671 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
677 \begin_layout Itemize
700 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
726 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
743 \begin_layout Itemize
745 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
753 \begin_layout Itemize
776 \begin_layout Itemize
789 arg "buffer-write-as"
793 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
797 \begin_layout Itemize
799 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
811 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
815 \begin_layout Itemize
817 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
825 \begin_layout Itemize
839 \begin_layout Itemize
854 \begin_layout Standard
855 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
856 with a few minor differences.
859 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
870 command lists the available templates.
871 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
872 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
873 and possibly propose text fragments
877 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
880 you would otherwise need to
881 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
883 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
887 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
891 They can be of use for certain classes,
892 especially those for writing letters (see section
897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
899 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
906 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
907 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
910 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
918 \begin_layout Standard
919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
952 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
953 to open a file or create a new one,
955 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
960 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
965 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
977 \begin_layout Standard
999 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
1001 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
1004 people work on the same document at the same time.
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1009 If you plan to do this,
1010 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
1012 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1017 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1018 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1020 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1022 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1028 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1037 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1042 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1050 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1065 \begin_inset space ~
1070 will reload the document from disk.
1071 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last save
1072 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1084 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
1085 \change_inserted -712698321 1676620203
1089 \begin_layout Section
1091 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622914
1092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1094 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
1099 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
1102 \begin_layout Standard
1104 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623979
1106 lays much stress on safety.
1107 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
1108 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
1110 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
1112 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
1113 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
1114 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
1117 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
1118 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
1119 does not simply make a backup file,
1120 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
1121 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
1122 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
1123 \begin_inset space ~
1127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1129 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1134 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
1137 \begin_layout Standard
1139 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624009
1141 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
1144 \begin_layout Subsection
1146 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624109
1150 \begin_layout Standard
1152 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629660
1155 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1157 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1171 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1176 in preferences (see section
1177 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1183 reference "sec:Paths"
1192 then all backups are stored there.
1193 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1194 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1195 but also the path in their name,
1197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1211 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1216 \begin_layout Standard
1218 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624464
1219 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1220 and you need to enable
1221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1228 in order to see them.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1233 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624516
1234 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1235 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1237 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1240 \begin_layout Subsection
1242 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633415
1246 \begin_layout Standard
1248 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624657
1251 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1259 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1264 As opposed to the backup files,
1265 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1268 \begin_layout Standard
1270 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624841
1271 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1290 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1296 with all changes saved.
1297 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1302 program crash or power outage),
1303 and this is when they might become useful.
1306 \begin_layout Subsection
1308 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633419
1312 \begin_layout Standard
1314 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629567
1316 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1317 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1318 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1319 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1322 \begin_layout Standard
1324 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625158
1325 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 myfile.lyx.emergency
1339 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1341 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1344 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1345 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1348 \begin_layout Subsection
1350 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633427
1351 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1355 \begin_layout Standard
1357 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625452
1358 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1359 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1361 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1364 keeps a copy of the old version,
1367 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1370 where <n> is the old format (e.
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1377 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1380 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1381 that is alongside the original document or,
1383 in the backup directory.
1386 \begin_layout Standard
1388 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625483
1389 As with backup files,
1390 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1394 \begin_layout Subsection
1396 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625510
1397 When to Use Which File?
1400 \begin_layout Standard
1402 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625539
1403 Now why all these files?
1404 Because they have different purposes.
1408 \begin_layout Standard
1410 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625820
1412 terminates unexpectedly,
1415 \begin_layout Enumerate
1417 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625790
1418 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1420 This file has the latest changes,
1421 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1424 \begin_layout Enumerate
1426 \change_inserted -712698321 1676634256
1427 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1432 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1434 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1436 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1437 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1439 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1442 \begin_layout Enumerate
1444 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626178
1445 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1446 use the backup file.
1447 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1448 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1449 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1452 \begin_layout Standard
1454 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626301
1455 The fourth type of file,
1456 the backup file from old versions,
1457 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1460 \begin_layout Standard
1462 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629641
1463 So much for the safety net.
1464 We hope you will not need it,
1466 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1467 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1472 \begin_layout Section
1473 Basic Editing Features
1474 \begin_inset Index idx
1479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1488 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1495 \begin_layout Standard
1496 Like most modern word processors,
1498 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1499 can move by character,
1502 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1503 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1504 editing features and how to access them.
1505 We will start with cut and paste.
1508 \begin_layout Standard
1509 As you might expect,
1514 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1515 along with various other editing features.
1516 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1520 \begin_layout Itemize
1526 \begin_inset Index idx
1531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1561 \begin_layout Itemize
1567 \begin_inset Index idx
1572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1602 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 \begin_inset Index idx
1613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1639 \begin_layout Itemize
1643 \begin_inset space ~
1649 \begin_layout Itemize
1653 \begin_inset space ~
1659 \begin_layout Itemize
1663 \begin_inset space ~
1667 \begin_inset space ~
1673 \begin_inset Index idx
1678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1687 \begin_inset Index idx
1692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1708 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1718 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1725 The first three are self-explanatory.
1726 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1727 and other programs using
1749 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1754 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1755 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1756 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1757 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1761 \begin_inset space ~
1766 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1767 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1770 \begin_layout Standard
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1779 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1780 Possible formats include HTML,
1785 \begin_inset space ~
1792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1801 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1807 \begin_inset space \space{}
1810 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1813 \begin_layout Standard
1817 \begin_inset space ~
1820 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1822 \begin_inset space ~
1826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1830 \begin_inset space ~
1839 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1840 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1841 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1851 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1852 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1866 \begin_inset space ~
1874 \begin_inset space ~
1877 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1880 paste from the primary selection.
1881 This is normally the currently selected text.
1884 \begin_layout Standard
1887 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1911 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1913 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1917 Once you have found a word or expression,
1921 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1926 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1946 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1956 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1974 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1978 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1995 arg "word-find-backward"
1998 shortcut) to search backwards
2002 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
2003 Even if you close the widget,
2013 arg "word-find-backward"
2016 will search further.
2021 \begin_layout Standard
2023 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
2028 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
2031 \begin_inset space ~
2036 field and searches the next match.
2042 \begin_inset space ~
2047 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
2049 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
2051 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
2055 \begin_layout Standard
2057 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
2059 the following options are available:
2062 \begin_layout Itemize
2065 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2077 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
2080 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
2081 If the toggle is set,
2083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2094 will not match the word
2095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2108 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
2112 \begin_layout Itemize
2115 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
2119 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
2123 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
2128 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
2129 to only find complete words,
2131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2135 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
2140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2165 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
2169 \begin_layout Itemize
2172 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
2177 will limit search and replace,
2179 to the current cursor selection.
2182 \begin_layout Itemize
2185 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
2190 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
2191 without pressing the
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2202 \begin_layout Itemize
2204 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
2209 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
2210 If this is not checked,
2211 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
2212 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
2213 so you need to put it back manually.
2216 \begin_layout Standard
2217 \paragraph_spacing single
2219 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2220 The widget also has a
2224 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
2225 hiding replace and options.
2228 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
2230 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2235 button brings you back to the full size.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2239 \paragraph_spacing single
2242 also offers an advanced
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2249 \begin_inset space ~
2254 feature that is described in section
2255 \begin_inset space ~
2259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2261 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
2269 \begin_layout Standard
2273 \begin_inset space \space{}
2277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2285 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
2286 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
2290 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2297 \begin_layout Standard
2301 arg "inset-select-all"
2304 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2305 When the cursor is inside an inset
2308 arg "inset-select-all"
2311 selects the content of the inset.
2315 arg "inset-select-all"
2318 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2322 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2325 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2328 \begin_layout Section
2330 \begin_inset Index idx
2335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2356 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2363 \begin_layout Standard
2364 If you make a mistake,
2365 you can easily recover from it.
2367 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2370 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2373 or the toolbar button
2380 If you accidentally undo too much,
2383 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2386 or the toolbar button
2393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2404 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2407 \begin_layout Standard
2409 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
2410 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last saved,
2412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2419 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
2420 This is a consequence of the 100
2421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2424 step undo limit mentioned above.
2427 \begin_layout Standard
2436 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2438 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2439 but by blocks of text.
2442 \begin_layout Section
2444 \begin_inset Index idx
2449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2458 \begin_layout Standard
2459 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2462 \begin_layout Enumerate
2467 \begin_layout Itemize
2472 once anywhere in the edit window.
2473 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2477 \begin_layout Enumerate
2482 \begin_layout Itemize
2489 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2495 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2496 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2498 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2499 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2504 \begin_layout Itemize
2505 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2508 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2515 \begin_layout Enumerate
2523 \begin_layout Standard
2524 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2525 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2529 \begin_layout Section
2531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2533 name "sec:Navigating"
2538 \begin_inset Index idx
2543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2554 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2557 \begin_layout Itemize
2562 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2565 \begin_layout Itemize
2567 which is accessed either by the menu
2569 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2576 or by the toolbar button
2579 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2585 \begin_layout Itemize
2586 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2588 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2591 and use the same menu to return to them.
2592 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2595 \begin_layout Standard
2599 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2604 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2605 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2607 \begin_inset space ~
2612 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2613 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2616 \begin_layout Standard
2621 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2625 \begin_layout Subsection
2627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2629 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2641 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2656 \begin_inset Index idx
2661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2670 \begin_layout Standard
2671 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2673 labels and cross-references (see section
2674 \begin_inset space ~
2678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2680 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2687 or citations (see section
2688 \begin_inset space ~
2692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2694 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2700 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2705 For example with citations,
2706 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2709 \begin_layout Standard
2714 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2716 if you are displaying the list of
2718 Labels and References
2720 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2721 you can enter the text
2722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2729 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2738 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2739 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2744 option keeps it in the current view state.
2745 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2746 \begin_inset space ~
2749 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2750 \begin_inset space ~
2754 the subsections of sections
2755 \begin_inset space ~
2758 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2763 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2769 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2781 \begin_layout Standard
2788 button refreshes the TOC (
2789 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2791 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2795 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2797 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2801 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2805 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2809 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2813 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2815 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2819 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2821 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2825 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2827 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2831 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2835 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2837 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2841 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2845 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2849 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2853 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2857 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2861 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2865 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2869 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2871 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2875 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2890 you can move section
2891 \begin_inset space ~
2895 \begin_inset space ~
2898 2.4 or after section
2899 \begin_inset space ~
2904 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2917 (or the corresponding key bindings
2925 ) you can change the level of sections.
2926 You can make section
2927 \begin_inset space ~
2931 \begin_inset space ~
2935 \begin_inset space ~
2941 \begin_layout Standard
2942 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2946 \begin_layout Subsection
2947 Horizontal Scrolling
2948 \begin_inset Index idx
2953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2955 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2965 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2982 \begin_layout Standard
2984 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2985 \begin_inset space ~
2988 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2989 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2993 \begin_layout Standard
2994 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2998 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 is used on a small tablet computer
3003 \begin_layout Itemize
3004 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
3008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3016 \begin_inset space ~
3029 \begin_layout Itemize
3030 Math constructs with long command names
3033 \begin_layout Standard
3034 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
3035 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
3036 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
3037 window so that table
3038 \begin_inset space ~
3042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3044 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3050 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
3051 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
3054 \begin_layout Standard
3055 \begin_inset Float table
3062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
3065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3068 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3072 Horizontal scrolling test.
3080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3082 \begin_inset Tabular
3083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
3084 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3129 \begin_layout Section
3130 Input/Word Completion
3131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3133 name "sec:Input-Completion"
3138 \begin_inset Index idx
3143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3150 \begin_inset Index idx
3155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3186 \begin_layout Standard
3188 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
3189 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
3192 \begin_layout Standard
3193 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
3196 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3201 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3208 \begin_inset space ~
3212 \begin_inset space ~
3217 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
3221 \begin_inset space ~
3226 the completions are always shown in a popup.
3227 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
3230 \begin_inset space ~
3236 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
3237 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
3240 \begin_layout Standard
3242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
3247 key to accept a proposed completion.
3248 If several completions are possible,
3249 a popup is opened showing them.
3250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
3251 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3255 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
3265 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
3268 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
3270 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
3273 he special math option
3277 enables characters to be composed.
3279 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
3282 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
3287 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
3290 you want to insert the character
3291 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
3296 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
3299 input the characters
3300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3312 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
3314 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
3318 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
3320 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
3325 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
3327 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
3330 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
3332 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
3334 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
3337 supported character combinations can be found in the file
3342 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
3344 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
3348 's installation folder.
3350 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
3351 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
3357 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
3362 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
3363 In the example above,
3369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3402 \begin_layout Section
3404 \begin_inset Index idx
3409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 \begin_inset Index idx
3421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3438 \begin_inset Index idx
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 \begin_layout Standard
3463 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3479 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3482 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3486 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3487 \begin_inset space ~
3491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3493 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3501 \begin_layout Standard
3506 \begin_inset space ~
3515 \begin_inset space ~
3540 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3544 \begin_layout Labeling
3545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3549 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3550 LatexCommand nomenclature
3552 description "Tabulator key"
3559 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3561 If you do not understand this,
3563 \begin_inset space ~
3567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3569 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3577 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3584 \begin_inset space ~
3588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3590 reference "subsec:Lists"
3599 If you are still confused,
3605 \begin_inset Newline newline
3613 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3614 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3617 \begin_layout Labeling
3618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3622 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3623 LatexCommand nomenclature
3625 description "Escape key"
3633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3642 to cancel operations.
3643 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3646 \begin_layout Labeling
3647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3652 These move the cursor,
3654 to the beginning and end of a line,
3655 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 There are three modifier keys:
3662 \begin_layout Labeling
3663 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3681 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3682 LatexCommand nomenclature
3684 description "Control key"
3689 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3693 \begin_layout Itemize
3703 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3706 \begin_layout Itemize
3716 it moves by words instead of characters.
3719 \begin_layout Itemize
3729 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3734 \begin_layout Labeling
3735 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3753 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3754 LatexCommand nomenclature
3756 description "Shift key"
3761 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3764 \begin_layout Labeling
3765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3783 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3784 LatexCommand nomenclature
3786 description "Alt or Meta key"
3791 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3792 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3793 If you have both keys,
3794 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3799 \begin_inset Newline newline
3802 This key does many different things,
3803 but it also activates the
3805 menu accelerator keys
3808 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3809 it selects that menu item.
3813 \begin_layout Standard
3816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3822 \begin_inset space ~
3826 \begin_inset space ~
3832 \begin_inset space ~
3840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3859 \begin_inset space ~
3865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3880 manual lists all other things bound to the
3888 \begin_layout Standard
3889 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3890 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3891 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3893 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3894 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3895 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3912 followed by a capital
3919 \begin_layout Chapter
3922 \begin_inset Index idx
3927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3930 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Section
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3973 \begin_layout Subsection
3977 \begin_layout Standard
3978 Before you do anything else,
3979 before you ever start writing a document,
3980 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3981 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3986 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3987 and format the title of your document differently.
3990 \begin_layout Standard
3995 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3996 By setting the document class,
3997 you automatically select these properties,
3998 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3999 If you don't choose a document class,
4001 picks one for you by default.
4002 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
4005 \begin_layout Subsection
4007 \begin_inset Index idx
4012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4031 name "sec:Document-Classes"
4038 \begin_layout Standard
4039 You can select a class using the
4041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4042 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 Select the class you want to use,
4069 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
4072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4076 \begin_layout Standard
4077 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
4082 \begin_layout Description
4083 Article for basic articles
4086 \begin_layout Description
4087 Report for basic reports
4090 \begin_layout Description
4091 Book for writing a book
4094 \begin_layout Description
4095 Letter for US-style letters
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 There are also some non-standard classes,
4100 which \SpecialChar LyX
4101 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4103 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
4104 distributions will include many of these.
4105 Here are some of the classes.
4106 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
4108 Special Document Classes
4117 \begin_layout Description
4118 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
4121 \begin_layout Description
4122 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
4125 \begin_layout Description
4126 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
4129 \begin_layout Description
4130 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
4131 There are three article layouts available.
4132 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
4133 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
4134 All result-type statements (propositions,
4136 and so on) are sequenced together,
4139 and the like have their own sequence.
4141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4144 sequential numbering
4145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4148 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
4149 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
4150 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
4151 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
4154 \begin_layout Description
4155 Beamer Layout for presentations
4158 \begin_layout Description
4159 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
4160 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4162 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4166 \begin_layout Description
4167 Chess Layout to write about chess games
4170 \begin_layout Description
4172 \begin_inset space ~
4175 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
4178 \begin_layout Description
4179 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
4182 \begin_layout Description
4183 Foils Used to make transparencies
4186 \begin_layout Description
4187 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
4188 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4190 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4194 \begin_layout Description
4195 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
4198 \begin_layout Description
4199 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
4202 \begin_layout Description
4203 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
4206 \begin_layout Description
4207 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
4208 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
4209 automatic print space calculation etc.
4210 (Is used by this document.)
4213 \begin_layout Description
4214 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
4217 \begin_layout Description
4218 Powerdot Layout for presentations
4221 \begin_layout Description
4226 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
4227 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
4228 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
4229 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
4233 \begin_layout Description
4234 Slides Used to make transparencies
4237 \begin_layout Description
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4242 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
4245 \begin_layout Description
4246 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
4249 \begin_layout Standard
4250 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
4251 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
4253 Special Document Classes
4261 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
4264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4268 \begin_layout Standard
4269 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
4271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4276 \begin_inset Index idx
4281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 If you open a document that uses such a class,
4307 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
4308 So it may seem that something is wrong.
4311 \begin_layout Standard
4314 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
4321 are highly specialized.
4323 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
4324 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
4325 with a growing number.
4326 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
4327 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
4328 There are just too many of them.
4329 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
4332 \begin_layout Standard
4333 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
4334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4342 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
4343 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
4345 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
4348 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
4355 manual for information on how to install them.
4356 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Although \SpecialChar LyX
4364 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
4365 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
4367 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
4368 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
4369 The \SpecialChar LyX
4370 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
4373 users can write their own layout files,
4374 and many users have done so.
4377 Installing New Document Classes,
4385 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
4388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4392 name "subsec:Modules"
4397 \begin_inset Index idx
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4404 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4422 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
4423 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
4424 This is not available in any document class,
4425 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
4431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4435 \begin_inset Index idx
4440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
4460 \begin_layout Standard
4461 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4462 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
4464 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
4465 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4466 You can still use the module while editing your file,
4467 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
4468 since \SpecialChar LyX
4469 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4470 file without the missing prerequisites.
4471 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
4472 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4485 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4492 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4496 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4500 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4511 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4522 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4535 Some modules require other modules,
4536 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4538 will advise you about these things.
4546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4550 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4555 \begin_inset Index idx
4560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4562 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4579 \begin_layout Standard
4580 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4581 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4583 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4584 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4585 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4588 a particular document has very special needs,
4589 but you need a specific inset or
4590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4592 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4595 style only that one time.
4596 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4598 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4616 manual for information on how to use it.
4619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4623 \begin_layout Standard
4624 Each class has a default set of options.
4625 Here's a quick table describing them:
4628 \begin_layout Standard
4629 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4635 \begin_layout Standard
4637 \begin_inset Tabular
4638 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4639 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4641 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5098 \begin_layout Standard
5099 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
5105 \begin_layout Standard
5106 You're probably also wondering what
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset space ~
5115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5119 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
5120 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
5126 the rest do not and begin instead with the
5131 Some document classes,
5132 such as the ones for letters,
5133 don't use any section headings.
5154 We will describe these headings fully in section
5155 \begin_inset space ~
5159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5161 reference "subsec:Headings"
5169 \begin_layout Subsection
5171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5173 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5200 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5224 \begin_layout Standard
5225 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
5227 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5234 \begin_inset space ~
5242 \begin_inset space ~
5248 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
5249 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
5250 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
5251 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
5252 -class and its options,
5253 you have to read its manual.
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5258 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
5262 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
5266 \begin_inset space ~
5273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5279 \begin_inset space ~
5284 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
5285 You can choose between the following five options:
5288 \begin_layout Labeling
5289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5294 Use default page style of current class.
5297 \begin_layout Labeling
5298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5303 No page numbers or headings.
5306 \begin_layout Labeling
5307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5315 \begin_layout Labeling
5316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5321 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
5322 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
5323 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
5326 \begin_layout Labeling
5327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5332 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5338 \begin_inset Index idx
5343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5346 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5361 How they are defined is explained in section
5362 \begin_inset space ~
5366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5368 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
5378 \begin_inset space ~
5382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5384 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5392 \begin_layout Subsection
5393 Paper Size and Orientation
5394 \begin_inset Index idx
5399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5418 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 You can find the following options in the menu
5429 \begin_inset space ~
5436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5440 \begin_inset Index idx
5445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5447 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5464 \begin_layout Labeling
5465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5469 \begin_inset space ~
5474 What size paper to print on.
5479 \begin_layout Itemize
5485 \begin_layout Itemize
5491 \begin_layout Itemize
5497 \begin_layout Itemize
5503 \begin_layout Itemize
5511 \begin_layout Itemize
5517 \begin_layout Itemize
5524 \begin_layout Labeling
5525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5530 To choose whether to output as
5541 \begin_layout Labeling
5542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5546 \begin_inset space ~
5551 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5552 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5555 \begin_layout Subsection
5557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5559 name "subsec:Margins"
5564 \begin_inset Index idx
5569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5571 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5586 \begin_inset Index idx
5591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5600 \begin_layout Standard
5601 Paper margins are set in the menu
5603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5607 \begin_inset Index idx
5612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5614 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5631 \begin_layout Standard
5632 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5633 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5636 \begin_layout Subsection
5640 \begin_layout Standard
5641 If you change a document class,
5643 has to convert everything into the new class.
5644 That includes the paragraph environments.
5645 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5646 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5647 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5648 If this is the case,
5649 and you change the document class,
5651 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5660 The name of the style is retained,
5661 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5662 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5663 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5666 \begin_layout Section
5667 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5668 \begin_inset Index idx
5673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5675 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5692 \begin_layout Subsection
5694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5696 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5703 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5705 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5708 \begin_layout Standard
5709 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5710 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5711 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5712 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5716 paragraph of a section,
5727 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5728 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5730 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5733 \begin_layout Standard
5734 The space between paragraphs,
5735 like the line spacing,
5736 the space between headings and text —
5738 all the spacing for just about everything —
5739 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5742 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5746 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5749 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5750 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5757 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5758 goes to produce a printable file.
5764 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5766 gives you the ability globally to change
5770 these pre-coded spacings.
5771 We will explain more later.
5774 \begin_layout Subsection
5775 Paragraph Separation
5776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5778 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5783 \begin_inset Index idx
5788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5807 \begin_layout Standard
5815 \begin_inset space ~
5823 \begin_inset space ~
5830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5834 \begin_inset Index idx
5839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5841 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5855 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5859 \begin_layout Subsection
5863 \begin_layout Standard
5864 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5867 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5869 \begin_inset space ~
5874 dialog and toggle the
5877 \begin_inset space ~
5882 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5885 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5889 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5890 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5893 \begin_layout Standard
5894 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5897 \begin_layout Subsection
5899 \begin_inset Index idx
5904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5906 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5923 \begin_layout Standard
5926 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5930 \begin_inset Index idx
5935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5951 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset space ~
5963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5970 \begin_inset Index idx
5975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5992 installed to use this feature.
5997 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5999 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6001 \begin_inset space ~
6006 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
6009 \begin_layout Section
6010 Paragraph Environments
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
6018 \begin_inset Index idx
6023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6025 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6040 \begin_inset Index idx
6045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6046 Paragraph environments
6054 \begin_layout Subsection
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6059 Paragraph environments correspond to the
6062 \begin_layout Standard
6071 } \SpecialChar ldots
6081 \begin_inset Newline newline
6084 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6086 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
6088 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
6089 we urge you to read the
6098 also contains many more examples than this section does.
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6102 A paragraph environment is simply a
6103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6110 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
6111 This can include a particular style of font,
6118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6125 the different environments inside one another,
6126 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
6127 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
6128 on the fly margin adjustment,
6129 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
6130 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
6131 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
6134 \begin_layout Standard
6135 To choose a new paragraph environment,
6136 use the pull-down box
6137 \begin_inset Graphics
6138 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
6144 at the left end of the toolbar.
6146 will change the environment of the
6150 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
6151 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
6154 \begin_layout Standard
6163 create a new paragraph using the
6167 paragraph environment.
6169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6176 because if you are in one of these environments:
6179 \begin_layout Itemize
6185 \begin_layout Itemize
6191 \begin_layout Itemize
6197 \begin_layout Itemize
6203 \begin_layout Itemize
6209 \begin_layout Itemize
6215 \begin_layout Itemize
6221 \begin_layout Standard
6223 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
6228 rather than resetting it to
6233 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
6234 \begin_inset space ~
6238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6240 reference "sec:Nesting"
6248 \begin_layout Subsection
6252 \begin_layout Standard
6253 The default paragraph environment is
6258 It creates a plain paragraph.
6260 resets the paragraph environment,
6261 this is the one it chooses.
6263 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
6270 \begin_layout Standard
6271 You can nest a paragraph using the
6275 environment in just about anything else,
6276 but you can't really nest anything in a
6283 \begin_layout Subsection
6285 \begin_inset Index idx
6290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6309 \begin_layout Standard
6310 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
6311 title page has three parts:
6313 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
6314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6321 for thanks or contact information.
6322 For certain types of documents,
6324 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
6325 For other types of documents,
6327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6334 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
6337 \begin_layout Standard
6339 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
6354 Here's how you use them:
6357 \begin_layout Itemize
6358 Put the title of your document in the
6365 \begin_layout Itemize
6366 Put the author name in the
6373 \begin_layout Itemize
6374 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
6375 want to use a fixed date,
6376 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
6377 put that text in the
6382 Note that using this environment is optional.
6383 If you don't provide any,
6385 will automatically insert today's date.
6386 If you don't want a date,
6389 Suppress default date on front page
6393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6396 \begin_inset space ~
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 You can use footnotes to insert
6406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6413 or contact information.
6416 \begin_layout Subsection
6418 \begin_inset Index idx
6423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6432 name "subsec:Headings"
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6440 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
6442 takes care of the numbering for you.
6445 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6447 \begin_inset Index idx
6452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6454 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 \begin_layout Standard
6472 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
6476 \begin_layout Enumerate
6482 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6494 \begin_layout Enumerate
6500 \begin_layout Enumerate
6506 \begin_layout Enumerate
6512 \begin_layout Enumerate
6518 \begin_layout Standard
6520 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6521 separated by periods.
6522 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6523 Unlike the other headings,
6524 parts are numbered with
6525 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6527 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6529 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6535 \begin_layout Standard
6536 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6538 suppose you're writing a book.
6539 You group the book into chapters.
6541 does a similar grouping:
6544 \begin_layout Itemize
6549 is divided into either
6560 \begin_layout Itemize
6572 \begin_layout Itemize
6584 \begin_layout Itemize
6596 \begin_layout Itemize
6608 \begin_layout Itemize
6620 \begin_layout Standard
6621 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 Not all document types use the
6634 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6639 is the top-level heading.
6647 \begin_layout Standard
6653 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6655 labels it with its number,
6656 along with the number of the subsection,
6659 chapter that it's in.
6661 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6681 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6698 \begin_layout Standard
6699 The unnumbered section headings have a
6700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6707 at the end of their name.
6708 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6710 \begin_inset space ~
6714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6725 Changing the Numbering
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6728 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6735 \begin_layout Standard
6736 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6738 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6739 that's preset in the document class.
6740 Just as certain classes start with
6755 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6765 This is something you can change.
6768 \begin_layout Standard
6771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6775 \begin_inset Index idx
6780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6782 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6799 \begin_inset space ~
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6808 you will see two counters.
6813 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6814 numbers a section heading.
6815 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6818 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6819 Short Titles of Headings
6820 \begin_inset Index idx
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6827 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 \begin_inset Argument 1
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6854 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6861 \begin_layout Standard
6862 Some section or chapter titles,
6865 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6867 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6868 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6871 \begin_layout Standard
6873 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6874 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6875 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6876 To specify a short title,
6877 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6881 \begin_inset space ~
6887 This will insert a box labeled
6888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6892 \begin_inset space ~
6896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6899 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6900 This also works for captions inside floats.
6901 There can only be one short title per title.
6904 \begin_layout Standard
6905 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6912 \begin_layout Standard
6913 The following information applies to all section headings:
6916 \begin_layout Itemize
6917 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6920 \begin_layout Itemize
6921 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6924 \begin_layout Itemize
6925 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6928 \begin_layout Itemize
6929 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6932 \begin_layout Subsection
6936 \begin_layout Standard
6938 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6954 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6955 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6956 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6957 They also allow nesting,
6967 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6970 \begin_layout Standard
6971 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6980 when you start a new paragraph.
6982 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6986 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6989 once you are done typing in that poem,
6990 you have to change back to the
6994 environment yourself.
6997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7006 \begin_inset Index idx
7011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7020 \begin_layout Standard
7021 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
7022 it's time for the differences.
7031 are identical except for one difference:
7036 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
7045 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 Here's an example of the
7063 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
7064 See – no indentation!
7068 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
7070 there's no indentation,
7071 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7075 Here's another example,
7083 \begin_layout Quotation
7090 you will see the indentation.
7091 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
7096 is the environment for you!
7102 you were quoting other text.
7105 \begin_layout Quotation
7106 Here's a new paragraph.
7107 I could ramble on and on,
7108 like a politician at election time.
7114 \begin_layout Standard
7115 As the examples show,
7120 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
7121 They should put quotes in the
7126 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
7130 paragraph environment for quoted text.
7133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7135 \begin_inset Index idx
7140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7142 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7183 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
7192 \begin_inset Newline newline
7195 Which I did not rehearse!
7199 It could be much worse.
7200 This line could be long,
7203 so very long that it wraps around.
7204 It looks okay on screen,
7205 but in the printed version,
7206 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
7208 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
7214 \begin_inset Newline newline
7217 And make things look fine
7218 \begin_inset Newline newline
7224 arg "newline-insert newline"
7230 \begin_layout Standard
7236 does not indent both margins.
7237 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
7238 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
7242 arg "newline-insert newline"
7248 \begin_layout Subsection
7250 \begin_inset Index idx
7255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7271 \begin_layout Standard
7273 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
7284 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
7296 lets you provide your own label.
7297 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
7308 treats each paragraph as a list item.
7317 reset the environment to
7321 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
7322 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
7323 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
7327 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
7331 If you do this at the top level of a list,
7332 it returns you to the
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
7343 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
7344 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
7345 we suggest you read all of section
7346 \begin_inset space ~
7350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7352 reference "sec:Nesting"
7360 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7362 \begin_inset Index idx
7367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7369 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7393 \begin_layout Standard
7394 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
7398 paragraph environment.
7399 It has the following properties:
7402 \begin_layout Itemize
7403 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
7407 \begin_layout Itemize
7409 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
7412 \begin_layout Itemize
7413 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
7417 \begin_layout Itemize
7418 The items can have any length.
7420 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
7421 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
7428 \begin_layout Itemize
7433 environment inside another
7438 the label changes to a new symbol.
7442 \begin_layout Itemize
7443 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
7446 \begin_layout Itemize
7448 always shows the same symbol on screen.
7451 \begin_layout Itemize
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7459 reference "sec:Nesting"
7464 for a full explanation of nesting.
7468 \begin_layout Standard
7470 that explanation was also an example of an
7479 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
7482 \begin_layout Standard
7483 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
7484 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
7487 \begin_layout Itemize
7488 The label for the first level
7492 is a large black dot,
7497 \begin_layout Itemize
7498 The label for the second level is a dash.
7502 \begin_layout Itemize
7503 The label for the third is an asterisk.
7507 \begin_layout Itemize
7508 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7512 \begin_layout Itemize
7513 Back out to the third level.
7517 \begin_layout Itemize
7518 Back to the second level.
7522 \begin_layout Itemize
7523 Back to the outermost level.
7526 \begin_layout Standard
7527 These are the default labels for an
7532 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7537 dialog in the submenu
7542 \begin_inset Index idx
7547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7549 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7563 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7567 \begin_layout Standard
7568 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7569 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7576 reference "sec:Nesting"
7584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7586 \begin_inset Index idx
7591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7593 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7610 name "sec:Enumerate"
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7622 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7623 It has these properties:
7626 \begin_layout Enumerate
7627 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7631 \begin_layout Enumerate
7632 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7636 \begin_layout Enumerate
7638 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7641 \begin_layout Enumerate
7646 environment resets the counter to one.
7649 \begin_layout Enumerate
7663 \begin_layout Enumerate
7664 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7665 Items can have any length.
7668 \begin_layout Enumerate
7669 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7672 \begin_layout Enumerate
7673 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7676 \begin_layout Enumerate
7677 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7681 \begin_layout Standard
7691 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7693 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7694 labels the four different levels in an
7701 \begin_layout Enumerate
7702 The first level of an
7706 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7710 \begin_layout Enumerate
7711 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7715 \begin_layout Enumerate
7716 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7720 \begin_layout Enumerate
7721 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7724 \begin_layout Enumerate
7726 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7730 \begin_layout Enumerate
7731 Back to the third level
7735 \begin_layout Enumerate
7736 Back to the second level.
7740 \begin_layout Enumerate
7741 Back to the outermost level.
7744 \begin_layout Standard
7745 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7751 \begin_inset space ~
7755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7757 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7763 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7764 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 There is more to nesting
7773 environments than we've stated here.
7774 You should read section
7775 \begin_inset space ~
7779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7781 reference "sec:Nesting"
7786 to learn more about nesting.
7789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7791 \begin_inset Index idx
7796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7798 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7815 \begin_layout Standard
7816 Unlike the previous two environments,
7821 list has no fixed label.
7825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7832 of the first line as the label.
7836 \begin_layout Description
7838 This is an example of the
7845 \begin_layout Standard
7847 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7850 \begin_layout Standard
7852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7859 it is meant that the first usage of the
7863 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7864 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7865 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7869 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7878 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7884 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7886 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7888 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7892 \begin_inset space ~
7899 \begin_inset space ~
7903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7905 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7910 for more information.) Here is an example:
7913 \begin_layout Description
7915 \begin_inset space ~
7919 This one shows how to use a
7920 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7924 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7928 \begin_inset space ~
7940 \begin_layout Description
7946 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7947 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7948 It's not a good idea to use a
7952 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7953 You're better off using
7965 paragraphs into them.
7968 \begin_layout Description
7974 environments inside one another,
7975 nest them in other types of lists,
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 Notice that after the first line,
7982 indents subsequent lines,
7983 offsetting them from the first line.
7986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7988 \begin_inset Index idx
7993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8012 \begin_layout Standard
8017 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8018 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8022 \begin_layout Standard
8031 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
8032 Here are its properties:
8035 \begin_layout Labeling
8036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8038 \begin_inset space ~
8041 labels \SpecialChar LyX
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8050 of each line as the item label.
8055 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
8056 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
8058 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
8060 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
8063 space as described above.
8066 \begin_layout Labeling
8067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8068 margins As you can see,
8070 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
8071 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
8072 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
8075 \begin_layout Labeling
8076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8078 \begin_inset space ~
8081 width \SpecialChar LyX
8082 uses the width of the label,
8083 or the default width,
8085 If the label width is larger,
8087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8094 into the first line.
8096 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
8099 \begin_layout Labeling
8100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8102 \begin_inset space ~
8105 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
8109 environment has the same left margin.
8110 \begin_inset Newline newline
8113 To change the default width,
8114 select all items in the list.
8117 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8119 \begin_inset space ~
8124 dialog (toolbar button
8127 arg "layout-paragraph"
8134 \begin_inset space ~
8139 determines the default label width.
8140 You can use the text of your largest label here,
8141 but you can also use the letter
8142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8149 multiple times instead.
8150 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
8153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8160 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
8163 \begin_inset space ~
8168 every time you alter a label in a
8173 \begin_inset Newline newline
8176 The predefined default width is the length of
8177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8185 \begin_inset space ~
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8196 list the same way as the
8201 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
8206 environment gives you another way to do this,
8207 using a different overall layout.
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8215 lists inside one another,
8216 nest them in other types of lists,
8218 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
8220 \begin_inset space ~
8224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8226 reference "sec:Nesting"
8231 to learn about nesting.
8234 \begin_layout Standard
8235 There is yet another feature of the
8240 As you can see in the examples,
8242 left-justifies the item labels by default.
8243 You can use additional
8246 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
8251 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
8252 justifies the item label.
8256 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
8258 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
8260 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
8265 are documented in section
8266 \begin_inset space ~
8270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8272 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
8278 Here are some examples:
8281 \begin_layout Labeling
8282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8283 Left The default for
8290 \begin_layout Labeling
8291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8298 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
8303 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
8306 \begin_layout Labeling
8307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8312 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8318 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
8323 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
8326 \begin_layout Subsection
8328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8330 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
8335 \begin_inset Index idx
8340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 The features described in this section require that the module
8362 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
8364 is loaded in the document settings.
8365 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8371 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8379 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8397 Custom Enumerate Lists
8398 \begin_inset Index idx
8403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8405 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8415 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8432 \begin_layout Standard
8434 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
8436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8439 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
8440 There you add the command
8443 \begin_layout Standard
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8464 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8473 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
8487 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
8494 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
8495 For capital Roman numerals replace
8507 in the command above.
8508 For Arabic numerals use
8516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8523 items with capital or small Latin letters use
8539 \begin_layout Standard
8541 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8550 You can only number 26
8551 \begin_inset space ~
8554 items with Latin letters,
8555 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8564 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8565 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8571 \begin_layout Standard
8572 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8575 \begin_layout Enumerate
8576 \begin_inset Argument 1
8579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8605 \begin_layout Enumerate
8606 \begin_inset Argument 1
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8632 \begin_layout Enumerate
8637 \begin_layout Enumerate
8638 \begin_inset Argument 1
8641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8665 \begin_layout Enumerate
8666 \begin_inset Argument 1
8669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8696 For this list these commands were used:
8699 \begin_layout Standard
8710 \begin_inset Newline newline
8718 \begin_inset Newline newline
8726 \begin_inset Newline newline
8736 \begin_layout Standard
8743 makes the label emphasized and
8752 \begin_layout Standard
8753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8762 When you change the label of a list level,
8763 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8773 \begin_inset Index idx
8778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8780 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8807 \begin_layout Standard
8808 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8811 \begin_layout Enumerate
8812 \begin_inset Argument 1
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8834 \begin_inset Note Note
8837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8838 goes back to default numbering
8846 \begin_layout Enumerate
8850 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8858 \begin_layout Standard
8859 To resume an enumeration,
8866 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8867 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8868 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8875 \begin_layout Standard
8876 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8885 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8886 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8897 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8898 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8903 \begin_layout Standard
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8914 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 \begin_layout Enumerate
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8930 \begin_layout Enumerate
8931 \begin_inset Argument 1
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8950 This enumeration starts at 4
8953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8955 \begin_inset Index idx
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8962 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8980 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8981 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8988 \begin_layout Itemize
8989 with standard spacing
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8994 Add there the command
8998 to get no additional list space like in this example:
9001 \begin_layout Itemize
9002 \begin_inset Argument 1
9005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9024 \begin_layout Itemize
9028 \begin_layout Itemize
9032 \begin_layout Standard
9033 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9039 \begin_inset Index idx
9044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9047 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9062 For more information see its documentation,
9064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9074 \begin_layout Standard
9075 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
9076 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
9077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9080 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
9083 \begin_layout Enumerate
9084 \begin_inset Argument 1
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 \begin_layout Enumerate
9110 with negative indentation
9113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9114 Further Customization
9115 \begin_inset Index idx
9120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9139 \begin_layout Standard
9140 You can also change the style of description lists.
9144 \begin_layout Standard
9150 \begin_layout Standard
9151 changes the description label font,
9155 \begin_layout Standard
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 sets the list style.
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9166 An example where the command
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9182 \begin_layout Description
9184 \begin_inset space ~
9189 \begin_inset Argument 1
9192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9213 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
9214 therefore ionizing them.
9217 \begin_layout Description
9219 \begin_inset space ~
9223 In computer science,
9224 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
9226 or handles to a resource such as an object,
9228 disk space or other resource.
9231 \begin_layout Standard
9232 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9238 \begin_inset Index idx
9243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 For more information see its documentation
9262 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9272 \begin_layout Subsection
9274 \begin_inset Index idx
9279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9290 \begin_inset space ~
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9298 Although \SpecialChar LyX
9299 has document classes for letters,
9300 we've also created two paragraph environments called
9307 \begin_inset space ~
9313 To use the letter class,
9314 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
9315 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
9316 gags on the document.
9325 \begin_inset space ~
9330 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
9331 You can even nest them inside other environments,
9332 though you can't nest anything in them.
9335 \begin_layout Standard
9337 you're not limited to using
9344 \begin_inset space ~
9353 \begin_inset space ~
9360 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
9363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9367 name "sec:Address-Usage"
9374 \begin_layout Standard
9379 environment formats text in the style of an address,
9380 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
9385 \begin_inset space ~
9390 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
9391 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
9392 Here's an example of each:
9395 \begin_layout Right Address
9397 \begin_inset Newline newline
9401 \begin_inset Newline newline
9405 \begin_inset Newline newline
9412 \begin_layout Standard
9416 \begin_inset space ~
9422 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
9423 which \SpecialChar LyX
9424 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
9425 Here's an example of the
9432 \begin_layout Address
9434 \begin_inset Newline newline
9437 Where do I send this
9438 \begin_inset Newline newline
9441 Your post office and country
9444 \begin_layout Standard
9453 \begin_inset space ~
9458 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
9463 in either of these environments,
9465 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
9480 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
9489 arg "newline-insert newline"
9494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9495 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
9497 \begin_inset space ~
9501 \begin_inset space ~
9506 ) to start a new line in an
9513 \begin_inset space ~
9521 \begin_layout Subsection
9525 \begin_layout Standard
9526 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
9528 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
9531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9533 \begin_inset Index idx
9538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9547 \begin_layout Standard
9552 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
9554 you could use this environment anywhere,
9555 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
9558 don't bother trying to nest
9562 in anything else or vice versa.
9568 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9569 The book document classes ignores the
9574 and it's utterly silly to use
9578 in a letter document class.
9581 \begin_layout Standard
9586 environment does several things for you.
9588 it puts the centered label
9589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9597 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9599 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9600 just as you'd expect.
9602 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9604 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9606 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9609 \begin_layout Standard
9610 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9614 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9615 The new paragraph will still be in the
9621 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9624 \begin_layout Standard
9625 \begin_inset Float figure
9632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9634 \begin_inset Graphics
9635 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9643 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9648 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9669 \begin_layout Standard
9670 We would love to demonstrate the
9675 but since this document is in the
9676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9685 We inserted it therefore as figure
9686 \begin_inset space ~
9690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9692 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9698 If you have never heard of an
9699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9707 you can safely ignore this environment.
9710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9712 \begin_inset Index idx
9717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9726 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9733 \begin_layout Standard
9738 environment is used to list references.
9740 you could use this environment anywhere,
9741 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9753 \begin_layout Standard
9754 When you first open a
9760 adds a large vertical space,
9761 followed by the heading
9762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9777 depending on the document class.
9778 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9779 Each paragraph of the
9783 environment is a bibliography entry.
9789 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9790 Each new paragraph is still in the
9797 \begin_layout Standard
9799 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9801 For more information on that,
9802 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9803 's bibliography handling,
9804 have a look at section
9805 \begin_inset space ~
9809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9811 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9819 \begin_layout Subsection
9820 Special Environments
9823 \begin_layout Standard
9825 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9833 \begin_inset Index idx
9838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9848 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9855 \begin_layout Standard
9861 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9863 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9868 key as a fixed whitespace.
9872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9884 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9888 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9892 \begin_inset space ~
9896 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9898 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9903 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9922 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9924 If you need to insert blank lines,
9925 you will still need to use
9928 arg "newline-insert newline"
9947 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9949 when you finish using the
9955 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9962 environment inside of others.
9965 \begin_layout Standard
9966 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9969 \begin_layout Itemize
9973 arg "newline-insert newline"
9976 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9981 \begin_inset space \space{}
9991 arg "newline-insert newline"
9997 \begin_layout Itemize
10001 arg "newline-insert newline"
10011 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10017 \begin_layout Itemize
10018 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
10019 You must put at least one
10023 in any line you want blank.
10029 \begin_layout Itemize
10030 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
10034 since that will insert
10039 You get the typewriter double quotes with
10042 arg "self-insert \""
10048 \begin_layout Standard
10049 Here is an example:
10052 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10056 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10060 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10064 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10068 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10069 printf("Hello World!
10074 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10078 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10082 \begin_layout Standard
10083 This is just the standard
10084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10094 \begin_layout Standard
10102 such as program source,
10103 shell scripts and so on.
10104 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
10105 \begin_inset Index idx
10110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10111 Paragraph environments
10116 For longer parts of programming code,
10117 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
10119 Program Code Listings
10124 \begin_inset space ~
10132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10136 \begin_inset Index idx
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10155 environment is similar to the
10160 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
10165 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
10179 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
10180 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
10182 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
10185 space) and you can have empty lines.
10199 \begin_layout Itemize
10200 have a certain language and a text style
10203 \begin_layout Itemize
10204 contain hyperlinks,
10206 foot- and margin notes,
10210 index- and nomenclature entries,
10215 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
10219 \begin_layout Standard
10220 Because of these properties
10224 works like a typewriter.
10225 Here is an example:
10228 \begin_layout Verbatim
10233 \begin_layout Verbatim
10237 The following 2 lines are empty:
10240 \begin_layout Verbatim
10244 \begin_layout Verbatim
10248 \begin_layout Verbatim
10250 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
10255 \begin_layout Standard
10260 environment is identical to
10264 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
10265 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
10272 \begin_layout Verbatim*
10277 \begin_layout Section
10278 Nesting Environments
10279 \begin_inset Index idx
10284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10310 \begin_layout Subsection
10314 \begin_layout Standard
10316 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
10317 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
10318 For example you have three main points in an outline,
10319 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
10321 you have a list inside of another list,
10322 with the inner list
10323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10333 \begin_layout Enumerate
10337 \begin_layout Enumerate
10342 \begin_layout Enumerate
10346 \begin_layout Enumerate
10351 \begin_layout Enumerate
10355 \begin_layout Standard
10356 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
10357 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
10360 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10366 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_inset space ~
10378 \begin_inset space ~
10383 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
10384 Instead of the menu,
10385 you can also use the toolbar buttons
10388 arg "depth-increment"
10394 arg "depth-decrement"
10397 or the key bindings
10408 arg "depth-increment"
10414 arg "depth-decrement"
10418 The change will work on the current selection,
10419 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
10420 or the current paragraph.
10423 \begin_layout Standard
10424 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
10425 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
10426 If it is invalid to do so,
10427 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
10429 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
10430 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
10433 \begin_layout Standard
10434 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
10435 In \SpecialChar LyX
10437 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
10438 as you're about to find out.
10439 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
10442 \begin_layout Subsection
10443 What You Can and Can't Nest
10446 \begin_layout Standard
10447 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
10448 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
10451 \begin_layout Standard
10452 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
10453 There are three types of paragraph environments:
10456 \begin_layout Itemize
10457 Completely unnestable
10460 \begin_layout Itemize
10462 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
10465 \begin_layout Itemize
10467 you can nest them into other environments,
10468 but you can't nest anything into them.
10471 \begin_layout Standard
10472 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
10473 and which paragraph environments have them:
10476 \begin_layout Description
10477 Unnestable Can't nest them.
10478 Can't nest into them.
10482 \begin_layout Itemize
10488 \begin_layout Itemize
10494 \begin_layout Itemize
10500 \begin_layout Itemize
10506 \begin_layout Itemize
10513 \begin_layout Description
10515 \begin_inset space ~
10518 Nestable You can nest them.
10519 You can nest other things into them.
10523 \begin_layout Itemize
10529 \begin_layout Itemize
10535 \begin_layout Itemize
10541 \begin_layout Itemize
10547 \begin_layout Itemize
10553 \begin_layout Itemize
10559 \begin_layout Itemize
10565 \begin_layout Itemize
10572 \begin_layout Itemize
10578 \begin_layout Itemize
10585 \begin_layout Description
10586 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10587 You can't nest anything into them.
10591 \begin_layout Itemize
10597 \begin_layout Itemize
10603 \begin_layout Itemize
10609 \begin_layout Itemize
10615 \begin_layout Itemize
10621 \begin_layout Itemize
10627 \begin_layout Itemize
10633 \begin_layout Itemize
10639 \begin_layout Itemize
10645 \begin_layout Itemize
10651 \begin_layout Itemize
10657 \begin_layout Itemize
10663 \begin_layout Itemize
10669 \begin_layout Itemize
10673 \begin_inset space ~
10679 \begin_layout Itemize
10686 \begin_layout Standard
10687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10696 Although it is possible,
10698 to nest numbered section headings like
10709 \begin_inset space ~
10713 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10721 \begin_layout Subsection
10722 Nesting Other Things:
10727 \begin_inset Index idx
10732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10734 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10751 \begin_layout Standard
10752 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10753 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10757 \begin_layout Itemize
10761 \begin_layout Itemize
10765 \begin_layout Itemize
10769 \begin_layout Standard
10771 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10780 Figures and tables in
10784 are not affected by this.
10789 Have a look at section
10790 \begin_inset space ~
10794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10796 reference "sec:Floats"
10801 for more information about
10808 \begin_layout Standard
10810 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10813 or an equation is inline,
10814 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10817 \begin_layout Standard
10819 if you have an equation,
10820 figure or table in a
10821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10829 it behaves just like a
10830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10837 paragraph environment.
10838 You can nest it into any environment,
10839 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10842 \begin_layout Standard
10843 Here's an example with a table:
10846 \begin_layout Enumerate
10851 \begin_layout Enumerate
10852 This is (a) and it's nested.
10856 \begin_layout Standard
10857 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10863 \begin_layout Standard
10865 \begin_inset Tabular
10866 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10867 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10953 \begin_layout Standard
10954 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10961 \begin_layout Enumerate
10963 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10967 \begin_layout Enumerate
10971 \begin_layout Standard
10972 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10973 the list would look like this:
10976 \begin_layout Enumerate
10981 \begin_layout Enumerate
10982 This is (a) and it's nested.
10986 \begin_layout Standard
10987 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10993 \begin_layout Standard
10995 \begin_inset Tabular
10996 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10997 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10998 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10999 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11083 \begin_layout Standard
11084 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11090 \begin_layout Enumerate
11098 it's not nested at all.
11101 \begin_layout Enumerate
11105 \begin_layout Standard
11106 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
11107 but is also the first item of a new list!
11110 \begin_layout Standard
11111 There's another trap you can fall into:
11113 but not going deep enough.
11115 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
11118 \begin_layout Enumerate
11123 \begin_layout Enumerate
11124 This is (a) and it's nested.
11127 \begin_layout Standard
11128 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11134 \begin_layout Standard
11136 \begin_inset Tabular
11137 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11138 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11139 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11140 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11225 \begin_layout Standard
11226 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11232 \begin_layout Enumerate
11234 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
11242 \begin_layout Enumerate
11246 \begin_layout Standard
11248 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
11254 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
11256 if you nest tables,
11257 figures or equations,
11258 make sure you go to the right depth!
11261 \begin_layout Subsection
11262 Usage and General Features
11265 \begin_layout Standard
11266 Speaking of levels,
11268 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
11271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11278 is the innermost possible depth.
11279 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
11282 \begin_layout Enumerate
11283 level #1 – outermost
11287 \begin_layout Enumerate
11292 \begin_layout Enumerate
11297 \begin_layout Enumerate
11302 \begin_layout Itemize
11307 \begin_layout Itemize
11316 \begin_layout Standard
11317 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
11318 and you can see both of them in the example.
11319 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
11320 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
11330 if we tried to nest another
11335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11343 we would get errors.
11346 \begin_layout Subsection
11348 \begin_inset Index idx
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11355 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 \begin_layout Standard
11373 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
11374 We have several examples of nested environments.
11376 we explain how we created the example,
11377 so that you can reproduce them.
11380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11382 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
11385 \begin_layout Labeling
11386 \labelwidthstring MMM
11387 #1-a This is the outermost level.
11396 \begin_layout Labeling
11397 \labelwidthstring MMM
11398 #2-a This is level #2.
11399 We created it by using
11402 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11408 arg "depth-increment"
11415 \begin_layout Labeling
11416 \labelwidthstring MMM
11417 #3-a This is level #3.
11427 arg "depth-increment"
11431 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
11435 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11441 arg "depth-increment"
11448 \begin_layout Standard
11455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11465 We did this by entering
11468 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11475 arg "depth-increment"
11479 then changing the paragraph environment to
11484 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
11485 it also works for the
11502 \begin_layout Standard
11512 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11518 \begin_layout Labeling
11519 \labelwidthstring MMM
11520 #4-a This is level #4.
11524 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11527 and changed the paragraph environment back to
11533 we can't nest anything inside a
11538 which is why we're still at level #4.
11544 keep nesting things inside
11545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11556 \begin_layout Labeling
11557 \labelwidthstring MMM
11558 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
11563 \begin_layout Labeling
11564 \labelwidthstring MMM
11565 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
11566 and this is level #6.
11568 you should know how we made these two.
11572 \begin_layout Labeling
11573 \labelwidthstring MMM
11574 #5-b Back to level #5.
11578 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11584 arg "depth-decrement"
11591 \begin_layout Labeling
11592 \labelwidthstring MMM
11596 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11602 arg "depth-decrement"
11606 we're back at level #4.
11610 \begin_layout Labeling
11611 \labelwidthstring MMM
11612 #3-b Back to level #3.
11613 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11617 \begin_layout Labeling
11618 \labelwidthstring MMM
11619 #2-b Back to level #2.
11623 \begin_layout Labeling
11624 \labelwidthstring MMM
11626 back to the outermost level,
11628 After this sentence,
11633 and change the paragraph environment back to
11640 \begin_layout Standard
11641 We could have also used the
11660 environment in place of the
11665 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11673 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11674 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11679 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11689 arg "depth-increment"
11694 \begin_inset Newline newline
11698 we will change to the
11706 \begin_layout Enumerate
11715 \begin_layout Enumerate
11716 Notice how the nested
11720 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11725 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11729 \begin_layout Standard
11730 We ended this example by entering
11736 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11740 and reset the nesting depth by using
11743 arg "depth-decrement"
11749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11762 \begin_inset Argument 1
11765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 Levels and other list environments
11776 \begin_layout Enumerate
11782 paragraph environment.
11783 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11787 \begin_layout Enumerate
11792 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11798 arg "depth-increment"
11803 what happens if we nest an
11807 environment inside of this one?
11808 It will be at level #3,
11809 but what will its label be?
11814 \begin_layout Itemize
11826 even though it's at level #3.
11828 its label is a bullet.
11829 (We got here by using
11832 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11839 arg "depth-increment"
11843 then changing the environment to
11851 \begin_layout Itemize
11856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11863 arg "depth-increment"
11867 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11872 \begin_layout Enumerate
11874 to get to level #5.
11877 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11882 Notice the type of numbering,
11888 because we are in the
11896 environment (that is,
11912 \begin_layout Enumerate
11917 change the paragraph environment,
11918 but decrease the nesting depth?
11919 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11923 \begin_layout Enumerate
11925 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11929 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11932 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11935 \begin_layout Enumerate
11939 arg "depth-decrement"
11942 to decrease the depth after the next
11945 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11952 \begin_layout Enumerate
11954 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11959 \begin_layout Enumerate
11961 Even though we've changed levels,
11963 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11966 \begin_layout Enumerate
11968 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11980 that \SpecialChar LyX
11985 reset the counter for the label.
11989 \begin_layout Enumerate
11993 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11999 arg "depth-decrement"
12003 and we're back to level #2.
12005 we not only changed the nesting depth,
12006 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
12014 \begin_layout Enumerate
12015 The same thing happens if we do another
12018 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12024 arg "depth-decrement"
12027 sequence and return to level #1,
12028 the outermost level.
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12033 we reset the environment to
12039 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
12049 The number of other
12053 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
12059 The same rule applies for the
12067 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12072 \begin_layout Enumerate
12073 We're going to go totally nuts now.
12074 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
12075 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12094 arg "depth-increment"
12103 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
12105 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
12106 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
12107 Either before or after this,
12108 we will put in the level.
12112 \begin_layout Enumerate
12119 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
12123 \begin_layout Verse
12124 Now we will add verse.
12125 \begin_inset Newline newline
12128 It will get much worse.
12129 \begin_inset Newline newline
12140 arg "depth-increment"
12152 \begin_layout Verse
12155 \begin_inset Newline newline
12158 Bippitey boppitey boo!
12159 \begin_inset Newline newline
12165 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12173 \begin_layout Verse
12174 Here comes a table:
12178 \begin_layout Standard
12179 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
12185 \begin_layout Standard
12187 \begin_inset Tabular
12188 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
12189 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
12196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
12234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12276 \begin_layout Verse
12280 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12292 arg "depth-increment"
12299 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12306 \begin_inset Newline newline
12314 arg "depth-decrement"
12321 \begin_layout Enumerate
12328 level #1) This is another item.
12329 Note that selecting a
12333 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
12334 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
12341 \begin_layout Quotation
12342 We're now ending the
12346 list and changing to
12351 We're still at level #1.
12352 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
12353 The next set of paragraphs is a
12354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12361 We will nest both the
12368 \begin_inset space ~
12373 environments inside of this one,
12374 then use another nested
12378 for the letter body.
12382 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12385 to preserve the depth.
12386 Remember that you need to use
12389 arg "newline-insert newline"
12392 to create multiple lines inside the
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12409 \begin_layout Right Address
12411 \begin_inset Newline newline
12416 \begin_inset Newline newline
12422 \begin_layout Address
12424 \begin_inset space ~
12430 \begin_layout Quotation
12431 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
12432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12435 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
12437 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
12438 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
12439 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
12441 we thank you for your patience.
12444 \begin_layout Quotation
12447 now have a special on beef.
12448 If you are interested,
12449 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
12450 along with payment.
12453 \begin_layout Quotation
12454 We thank you again for your patience.
12457 \begin_layout Address
12459 \begin_inset Newline newline
12466 \begin_layout Quotation
12467 That ends that example!
12470 \begin_layout Standard
12472 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
12473 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
12474 We could have easily nested an
12496 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
12499 \begin_layout Subsection
12501 \begin_inset Index idx
12506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12508 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12525 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
12532 \begin_layout Standard
12533 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
12534 For example you need two different enumerations:
12537 \begin_layout Enumerate
12542 \begin_layout Enumerate
12547 \begin_layout Enumerate
12551 \begin_layout Standard
12552 \begin_inset Separator plain
12558 \begin_layout Itemize
12564 \begin_layout Standard
12565 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12571 \begin_layout Enumerate
12575 \begin_layout Enumerate
12579 \begin_layout Enumerate
12583 \begin_layout Standard
12584 To split an existing list into two lists,
12585 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12588 Separated <Name> Above
12592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12593 Separated <Name> Below
12596 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12597 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12598 Inside nested environments,
12599 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12604 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12607 \begin_layout Standard
12609 you get an environment separator when you press
12612 arg "paragraph-break"
12619 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12622 \begin_layout Section
12624 Pagination and Line Breaks
12625 \begin_inset Index idx
12630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12639 \begin_layout Standard
12641 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12643 offers you more spaces:
12644 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12645 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12648 \begin_layout Subsection
12650 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
12652 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
12656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12658 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12663 \begin_inset Index idx
12668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12670 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12675 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
12677 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
12693 \begin_layout Standard
12695 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
12697 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
12701 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12702 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12704 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
12707 break the line at that point.
12708 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12712 \begin_layout Quote
12713 Further documentation is given in section
12714 \begin_inset Newline newline
12718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12720 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12728 \begin_layout Standard
12730 it would be a good thing to put a
12731 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12733 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12751 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12762 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12764 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12772 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12774 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12778 \begin_inset space ~
12786 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12792 \begin_layout Subsection
12794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12796 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12801 \begin_inset Index idx
12806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12808 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12825 \begin_layout Standard
12826 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12829 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12833 The length units are listed in Appendix
12834 \begin_inset space ~
12838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12840 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12850 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12852 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12856 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12860 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12865 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12869 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12876 \begin_inset Index idx
12881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12883 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12888 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12890 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12906 \begin_layout Standard
12907 With the introduction of typewriters,
12908 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12909 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12910 automatically takes care about this.
12912 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12914 \begin_inset space ~
12918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12920 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12926 To insert a normal space,
12929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12930 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12932 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12934 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12946 arg "space-insert normal"
12952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12954 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12960 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12965 \begin_inset Index idx
12970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12972 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12989 \begin_layout Standard
12991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12995 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13002 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
13003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13007 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
13009 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
13013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13017 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
13019 inside abbreviations:
13022 \begin_layout Quote
13024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13028 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
13031 \begin_layout Standard
13032 or between values and units.
13033 Compare for example this:
13034 \begin_inset Newline newline
13038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13042 \begin_inset Newline newline
13045 10 kg (normal space
13046 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
13052 \begin_layout Standard
13053 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
13055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13056 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13058 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
13060 \begin_inset space ~
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13074 arg "space-insert thin"
13080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13084 \begin_layout Standard
13085 You can also insert the following space types:
13088 \begin_layout Description
13090 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13098 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13102 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
13106 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13110 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
13112 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
13115 space between the arrows.
13116 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
13120 \begin_layout Description
13122 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
13124 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13131 space A line with a
13132 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13136 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
13140 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13144 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
13146 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
13149 space between the arrows.
13152 \begin_layout Description
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13158 \begin_inset space ~
13161 space A line with a
13162 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13166 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
13170 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13173 negative thin space between the arrows.
13176 \begin_layout Description
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13182 \begin_inset space ~
13185 space A line with a
13186 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13190 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
13194 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13197 negative medium space between the arrows.
13200 \begin_layout Description
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13209 space A line with a
13210 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13214 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
13218 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13221 negative thick space between the arrows.
13224 \begin_layout Description
13226 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
13228 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
13230 \begin_inset space ~
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13244 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13248 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
13252 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13256 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
13258 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
13260 \begin_inset space ~
13266 \begin_inset space ~
13270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13273 em) space between the arrows.
13276 \begin_layout Description
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13286 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13290 \begin_inset space \quad{}
13294 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13298 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
13300 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13311 em) space between the arrows.
13314 \begin_layout Description
13316 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
13318 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
13320 \begin_inset space ~
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13334 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13338 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
13342 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13346 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
13348 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
13350 \begin_inset space ~
13354 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
13358 \begin_inset space ~
13362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13365 em) space between the arrows.
13368 \begin_layout Description
13370 \begin_inset space ~
13374 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13378 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
13383 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13390 cm space between the arrows.
13393 \begin_layout Standard
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13401 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
13406 lists the different space sizes.
13409 \begin_layout Standard
13410 \begin_inset Float table
13417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13418 \begin_inset Caption Standard
13420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13423 name "tab:Width-of-the"
13427 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
13435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13437 \begin_inset Tabular
13438 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
13439 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
13440 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13441 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13443 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13467 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13476 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13491 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13496 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
13498 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
13499 Non-breaking Normal
13506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13521 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13539 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
13541 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13556 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13557 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13562 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13568 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13573 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13584 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13590 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13596 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13601 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13622 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13627 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
13629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13633 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13658 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13682 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13702 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
13704 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
13708 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
13710 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
13714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13727 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13729 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13737 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13739 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13755 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13783 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13788 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13790 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13830 \begin_inset Index idx
13835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13837 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13854 \begin_layout Standard
13855 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13856 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13858 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13861 Fill is actually a variable length space,
13862 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13863 If there is more than one H
13864 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13868 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13871 \begin_layout Standard
13872 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13875 \begin_layout Quote
13877 This is on the left side
13878 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13881 This is on the right
13884 \begin_layout Quote
13887 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13891 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13897 \begin_layout Quote
13900 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13908 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13914 \begin_layout Standard
13915 That was an example in the
13921 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13925 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13929 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13932 is one in a standard paragraph.
13933 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13938 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13941 \begin_layout Standard
13943 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13945 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13948 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13951 \begin_inset space ~
13956 s in the space dialog:
13957 The following patterns are available:
13960 \begin_layout Standard
13963 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13967 \begin_inset space ~
13973 \begin_layout Standard
13976 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13980 \begin_inset space ~
13986 \begin_layout Standard
13989 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13993 \begin_inset space ~
13999 \begin_layout Standard
14002 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
14006 \begin_inset space ~
14012 \begin_layout Standard
14014 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
14016 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
14020 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
14021 (= opened downwards)
14025 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
14029 \begin_inset space ~
14035 \begin_layout Standard
14037 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
14039 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
14043 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
14048 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
14052 \begin_inset space ~
14058 \begin_layout Standard
14059 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14069 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
14071 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
14074 is at the beginning of a line,
14079 in the first line in a paragraph,
14083 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
14085 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
14088 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
14089 If you need space in this case anyway,
14091 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
14095 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
14100 option in the space dialog.
14108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14112 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14117 \begin_inset Index idx
14122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14124 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14141 \begin_layout Standard
14142 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
14144 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
14147 \begin_layout Standard
14148 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14151 What is correct English?:
14152 \begin_inset Newline newline
14156 \begin_inset Newline newline
14160 \begin_inset space ~
14163 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
14164 \begin_inset Newline newline
14168 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14179 \begin_inset Newline newline
14183 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14194 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14200 \begin_layout Standard
14202 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
14203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14207 \begin_inset space ~
14211 \begin_inset space ~
14215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14220 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
14222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14223 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14227 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
14228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14232 \begin_inset space ~
14236 \begin_inset space ~
14240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14243 into the phantom inset (note the space after
14244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14252 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
14253 That is why it is named
14254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14262 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
14263 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
14266 \begin_layout Subsection
14268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14270 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
14275 \begin_inset Index idx
14280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14299 \begin_layout Standard
14300 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
14303 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14304 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14306 \begin_inset space ~
14312 There you find the following sizes:
14315 \begin_layout Standard
14319 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
14328 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
14336 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
14341 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
14342 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
14346 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
14351 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
14353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14356 \begin_inset space ~
14362 \begin_inset Index idx
14367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14369 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14383 for the paragraph separation.
14384 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
14387 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
14395 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
14401 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
14405 \begin_layout Standard
14407 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
14416 equal to the height,
14417 or half the height,
14418 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
14423 \begin_layout Standard
14427 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
14433 \begin_inset Index idx
14438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14440 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14454 is a variable space,
14455 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
14457 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
14462 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
14463 because the space between them is then maximal.
14467 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
14475 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
14481 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
14485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14489 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
14494 s are described in section
14495 \begin_inset space ~
14499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14501 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
14511 If there are several
14514 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
14520 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
14521 You can therefore use
14524 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
14529 s to center text on a page,
14530 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
14533 \begin_layout Standard
14538 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
14539 \begin_inset space ~
14543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14545 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
14553 \begin_layout Standard
14554 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14565 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
14566 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
14578 \begin_layout Subsection
14579 Paragraph Alignment
14580 \begin_inset Index idx
14585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14587 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14604 \begin_layout Standard
14605 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
14607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14610 dialog (toolbar button
14613 arg "layout-paragraph"
14617 There are five possibilities:
14620 \begin_layout Itemize
14628 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
14634 \begin_layout Itemize
14642 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
14648 \begin_layout Itemize
14656 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
14662 \begin_layout Itemize
14670 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
14676 \begin_layout Itemize
14684 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
14690 \begin_layout Standard
14691 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
14692 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
14693 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
14694 and look like this:
14697 \begin_layout Standard
14699 This paragraph is right aligned,
14702 \begin_layout Standard
14704 this one is centered,
14707 \begin_layout Standard
14709 this one is left aligned.
14712 \begin_layout Subsection
14714 \begin_inset Index idx
14719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14721 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14738 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
14745 \begin_layout Standard
14746 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
14747 does the page breaks in your document,
14748 you can force a page break where you want one.
14749 Normally this will not be necessary,
14750 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
14751 is good at page breaking.
14752 Only if you use a lot of
14758 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14761 \begin_layout Standard
14762 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14766 have to change the page breaking.
14769 \begin_layout Standard
14770 There are two types of page breaks:
14771 One that ends the page without any special action.
14772 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14775 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14777 \begin_inset space ~
14784 that is inserted via the menu
14786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14787 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14789 \begin_inset space ~
14795 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
14796 so that it fills out the complete page.
14797 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
14800 \begin_layout Standard
14801 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
14804 the wrong way to do it.
14806 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
14807 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14811 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14816 to learn more about
14823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14827 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14832 \begin_inset Index idx
14837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14839 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14856 \begin_layout Standard
14857 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
14858 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14859 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
14860 including unprocessed floats,
14861 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
14862 if necessary by adding pages.
14865 \begin_layout Standard
14866 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14869 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14871 \begin_inset space ~
14877 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
14878 you can use the menu
14880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14881 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14887 \begin_inset space ~
14892 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14893 if necessary by adding a page.
14894 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14900 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14901 Suppressing Page Breaks
14904 \begin_inset Index idx
14909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14911 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14915 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14930 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14934 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14939 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14943 \begin_layout Standard
14945 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14946 To discourage page break at
14947 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14949 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14950 certain point you can use
14954 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14956 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14959 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14961 \change_deleted 5381 1686690158
14963 \change_inserted 5381 1686690161
14965 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14972 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14973 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14978 \begin_layout Subsection
14980 \begin_inset Index idx
14985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14994 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
15001 \begin_layout Standard
15002 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
15003 one simply breaks the line.
15004 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
15006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15007 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15009 \begin_inset space ~
15013 \begin_inset space ~
15021 arg "newline-insert newline"
15025 Another type that is inserted via the menu
15027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15028 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15030 \begin_inset space ~
15034 \begin_inset space ~
15042 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
15045 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
15046 This is useful to avoid
15047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15054 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
15057 \begin_layout Standard
15058 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
15060 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
15061 is very good at line breaking.
15064 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
15066 in a poem or for an address (see sections
15067 \begin_inset space ~
15071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15073 reference "sec:Quote"
15080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15082 reference "sec:Verse"
15088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15090 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
15098 \begin_layout Subsection
15100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15102 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
15107 \begin_inset Index idx
15112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15121 \begin_layout Standard
15123 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15134 \begin_layout Standard
15138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15139 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15141 \begin_inset space ~
15146 you can insert horizontal lines.
15147 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
15148 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
15151 \begin_layout Standard
15153 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15164 \begin_layout Section
15165 Characters and Symbols
15168 \begin_layout Standard
15169 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
15170 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
15172 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
15174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15180 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
15185 for information on how this is done.
15188 \begin_layout Standard
15189 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
15194 dialog via the menu
15196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15197 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15203 \begin_layout Standard
15204 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15213 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
15215 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
15223 \begin_layout Section
15224 Fonts and Text Styles
15225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15227 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
15234 \begin_layout Subsection
15236 \begin_inset Index idx
15241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15243 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15260 \begin_layout Standard
15261 There are two types of fonts:
15264 \begin_layout Description
15266 \begin_inset space ~
15270 \begin_inset Index idx
15275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15277 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15291 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
15292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15296 characters) in the font.
15297 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
15298 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
15299 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
15300 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
15301 \begin_inset Newline newline
15304 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
15305 But to achieve a better quality,
15306 many fonts define several font sizes.
15307 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
15308 \begin_inset Newline newline
15324 \begin_inset space ~
15332 \begin_layout Description
15334 \begin_inset space ~
15338 \begin_inset Index idx
15343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15345 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15360 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
15361 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
15363 they don't scale well,
15364 because in order to scale a glyph,
15365 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
15366 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
15367 In order to mitigate this effect,
15368 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
15369 \begin_inset space ~
15372 pixels high up to 34
15373 \begin_inset space ~
15376 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
15377 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
15378 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
15379 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
15381 \begin_inset Newline newline
15384 Bitmap fonts are named
15387 \begin_inset space ~
15392 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
15395 \begin_layout Standard
15396 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
15397 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
15398 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
15399 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
15402 \begin_layout Standard
15403 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
15404 look at its document properties.
15407 \begin_layout Standard
15408 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying
15409 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
15411 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
15414 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
15416 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
15417 to emphasize text you use an
15418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15426 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
15428 In \SpecialChar LyX
15430 you do things based on contexts,
15431 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
15434 \begin_layout Subsection
15437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15439 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15446 \begin_layout Standard
15449 used its own fonts.
15451 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
15452 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15454 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15455 needs some extra information about the fonts,
15456 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
15457 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
15458 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
15459 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15460 files are very portable across different machines.
15462 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
15463 has increased a lot in the meantime;
15464 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
15466 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
15467 \begin_inset space ~
15471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15473 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
15479 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
15480 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
15483 \begin_layout Standard
15484 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
15485 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
15486 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15487 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15489 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
15492 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
15493 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
15496 \begin_layout Standard
15497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15507 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
15509 or other font deficiencies;
15510 so you might have to experiment.
15518 \begin_layout Subsection
15519 Document Font and Font size
15520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15522 name "subsec:Document-Font"
15527 \begin_inset Index idx
15532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15534 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15549 \begin_inset Index idx
15554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15556 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15573 \begin_layout Standard
15574 You can set the document fonts in the
15576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15580 \begin_inset Index idx
15585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15587 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15606 section of the dialog,
15607 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
15612 \begin_inset space ~
15622 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
15623 \begin_inset space ~
15626 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
15629 \begin_layout Standard
15635 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
15636 This requires that you use
15649 as the output format,
15651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15655 \begin_inset space \space{}
15658 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15659 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15660 installed (see section
15661 \begin_inset space ~
15665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15667 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15673 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
15675 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
15676 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
15678 \begin_inset space ~
15683 since \SpecialChar LyX
15684 cannot determine the family.
15685 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
15686 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15689 cannot determine this in advance,
15690 so you might need to experiment.
15693 \begin_layout Standard
15694 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
15695 fonts (which is the default),
15696 the possible options for the font include
15700 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15707 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
15709 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
15711 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
15716 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
15718 depending on the document language,
15722 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
15723 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15731 \begin_inset space ~
15737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15747 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
15748 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15756 \begin_inset space ~
15762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15770 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
15775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15792 European Computer Modern
15795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15804 some classes set different default fonts.
15807 \begin_layout Standard
15813 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
15814 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15819 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15822 \begin_inset space ~
15827 version 6 or later,
15828 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
15833 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
15834 you have to use a vector font.
15835 Depending on how your document should look,
15839 \begin_layout Itemize
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15849 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15861 \begin_inset space ~
15866 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15867 community in order to replace
15871 as the default font.
15872 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15873 Except for some details,
15874 where the appearance was improved,
15878 \begin_inset space ~
15891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15892 One difference is improved kerning.
15900 \begin_layout Itemize
15901 If you do not like the look of
15910 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
15912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15922 \begin_inset space ~
15932 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15933 \begin_inset space ~
15936 serif and typewriter fonts,
15940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15941 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15949 \begin_inset space ~
15958 for sans serif text),
15959 or different shapes of the same font,
15961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15965 \begin_inset space \space{}
15973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15977 \begin_inset space \space{}
15983 \begin_inset space ~
15991 \begin_inset space ~
16001 but you can also select your own.
16002 \begin_inset Newline newline
16005 The differences between roman,
16009 \begin_inset space ~
16018 fonts are explained in section
16019 \begin_inset space ~
16023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16025 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16031 \begin_inset Newline newline
16037 \begin_inset space ~
16042 was originally designed for newspapers.
16043 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
16047 \begin_inset space ~
16052 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
16055 \begin_layout Standard
16056 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
16072 Some classes provide additional sizes.
16077 depends on the class you are using.
16078 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
16081 \begin_layout Standard
16082 Note that the font size is the
16087 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
16088 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
16090 and subscripts) by this value.
16091 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
16094 \begin_inset space ~
16100 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
16101 \begin_inset space ~
16105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16107 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16115 \begin_layout Standard
16119 \begin_inset space ~
16124 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
16126 \begin_inset space ~
16129 serif or typewriter.
16134 selection uses what is preset by the class,
16135 the other selections override this.
16146 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
16149 \begin_layout Standard
16154 LaTeX font encoding
16156 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16162 \begin_inset Index idx
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16170 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16185 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
16187 \begin_inset space ~
16191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16193 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
16202 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
16203 Unless you have specific reasons,
16205 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
16209 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
16217 \begin_layout Standard
16221 Use Old Style Figures
16225 Use True Small Caps
16228 These are extra features some fonts provide.
16231 Use Old Style Figures
16234 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
16235 Old style figures are the numerals (0
16236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16243 9) with ascenders and descenders,
16244 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
16247 Use True Small Caps
16249 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
16250 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
16251 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
16252 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
16256 \begin_layout Standard
16258 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
16261 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
16266 if you use non-TeX fonts),
16272 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
16278 \begin_layout Standard
16283 allows users of the languages Chinese,
16285 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16290 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16296 \begin_inset Index idx
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16304 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16318 So this has no effect for the document language
16334 \begin_layout Standard
16337 Enable micro-typographic extensions
16339 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16345 \begin_inset Index idx
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16353 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16371 \begin_layout Standard
16374 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16376 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
16380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16383 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16389 instead of ligatures (--,
16391 \begin_inset space ~
16395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16397 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16408 \begin_layout Standard
16409 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
16413 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16422 When you choose a new font or font size,
16428 change the screen font!
16429 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
16430 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
16432 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
16434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
16439 \begin_inset space ~
16443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16445 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
16458 \begin_layout Subsection
16462 \begin_layout Standard
16463 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
16464 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
16465 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
16466 fonts for your document,
16467 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
16469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16473 \begin_inset Index idx
16478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16480 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16495 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
16496 automatically selects a math font.
16497 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
16498 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16499 's default font family
16500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16506 \begin_inset space ~
16512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16517 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
16520 \begin_layout Standard
16521 Note that the math font will not be used for
16525 (which is inserted with the shortcut
16531 or by the insertion of the command
16538 Also note that some math fonts are sans
16539 \begin_inset space ~
16543 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
16545 \begin_inset space ~
16548 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
16551 \begin_inset space ~
16559 \begin_inset space ~
16564 in the document font settings.
16567 \begin_layout Standard
16568 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
16569 fonts for the document,
16570 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
16571 font (in most cases
16572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16578 \begin_inset space ~
16584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16587 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
16588 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
16589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16595 \begin_inset space ~
16601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16607 \begin_layout Subsection
16609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
16611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
16615 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
16617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16619 name "subsec:charstyles"
16626 \begin_inset Index idx
16631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16638 \begin_inset Index idx
16643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16652 \begin_layout Standard
16653 As we've already seen,
16655 automatically changes the
16656 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
16659 style for certain paragraph environments.
16661 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
16663 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
16664 This is where we meet the concept of
16670 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
16672 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
16676 \begin_layout Standard
16678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
16684 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
16686 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
16700 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
16707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16711 available with all document classes.
16713 some document classes and modules provide
16717 for specific purposes.
16718 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
16721 \begin_layout Standard
16723 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
16726 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
16735 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
16740 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
16741 you selected it and chose e.
16742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16763 encourage the use of
16775 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16783 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16789 Rather than fiddling with
16794 they encourage the use of
16799 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
16800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16805 \begin_inset Quotes els
16809 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16814 \begin_inset Quotes els
16818 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16822 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
16824 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
16825 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
16826 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
16827 On a more practical level,
16828 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16829 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
16834 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16841 you would have to change any single occurrence.
16842 With a semantic markup (such as
16848 you'd just need to change the definition of
16853 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16856 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
16857 using different markup semantics.
16860 \begin_layout Standard
16862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16864 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
16870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16873 Builtin Text Styles
16874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16876 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16883 \begin_layout Standard
16885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16886 The two builtin text styles can be
16887 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16896 both of these styles
16899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16903 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16905 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16914 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16922 \begin_layout Standard
16928 do one of the following:
16931 \begin_layout Itemize
16932 click on the toolbar button
16941 \begin_layout Itemize
16942 use the key binding
16949 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16953 \begin_layout Itemize
16955 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16959 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16961 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16963 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16971 arg "dialog-show character"
16975 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16979 arg "dialog-show character"
16983 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16984 as described in section
16985 \begin_inset space ~
16989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16991 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16997 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
17007 \begin_layout Standard
17009 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
17011 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
17015 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
17019 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
17021 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
17025 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
17034 style is already active,
17035 they deactivate it.
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 One typically uses the
17043 style for proper names.
17046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17053 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
17055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17059 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
17063 \begin_layout Standard
17065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
17071 is producing text in
17076 but the definition can be changed.
17081 \begin_layout Standard
17083 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
17085 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
17093 You can activate (or deactivate —
17094 it's also a toggle) the
17101 \begin_layout Itemize
17102 clicking on the toolbar button
17111 \begin_layout Itemize
17112 using the keybindings
17119 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
17123 \begin_layout Itemize
17125 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17129 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
17131 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
17133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17141 arg "dialog-show character"
17145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17149 arg "dialog-show character"
17153 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
17154 as described in section
17155 \begin_inset space ~
17159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17161 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17167 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
17177 \begin_layout Standard
17182 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
17184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
17186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
17189 packages use a different font
17190 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
17192 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17198 \begin_layout Standard
17199 We've been using the
17203 style all over the place in this document.
17204 Here's one more example:
17207 \begin_layout Quotation
17211 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
17213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
17219 \begin_layout Standard
17220 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
17221 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
17222 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
17223 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse
17224 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
17226 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
17231 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
17233 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17239 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
17240 In contrast to the custom text styles,
17241 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
17249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
17252 always reset to the default font using the key binding
17259 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
17261 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
17265 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
17268 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17270 \begin_inset space ~
17273 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17275 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17285 arg "dialog-show character"
17291 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17293 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
17299 arg "dialog-show character"
17303 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17309 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
17311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17313 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
17320 \begin_layout Standard
17322 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
17323 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
17324 a module (see section
17325 \begin_inset space ~
17329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17331 reference "subsec:Modules"
17340 or local layout settings (see section
17341 \begin_inset space ~
17345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17347 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
17353 As the two builtin styles,
17358 markup for specific functions.
17365 module that provides,
17366 among other things,
17367 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
17379 \begin_inset Quotes els
17383 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17389 \begin_layout Standard
17391 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17392 These styles can be found,
17396 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17398 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
17400 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17406 \begin_layout Standard
17408 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
17409 For the purpose of demonstration,
17410 we have loaded in this document the optional module
17414 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
17415 By example of the emphasized style,
17416 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
17421 appears as normal font change,
17422 the custom text style
17423 \begin_inset Flex Emph
17426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17428 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
17436 appears as an inset,
17437 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
17438 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
17440 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
17442 \begin_inset Flex Code
17445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17447 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
17457 \begin_inset Flex Strong
17460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
17472 \begin_inset Flex Noun
17475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17477 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
17486 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
17491 \begin_layout Subsection
17493 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
17495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
17499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
17505 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
17507 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
17513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
17515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
17519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17521 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17526 \begin_inset Index idx
17531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17540 \begin_layout Standard
17541 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
17542 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
17546 so \SpecialChar LyX
17548 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
17550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
17554 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
17555 the properties of text passages
17556 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
17561 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
17563 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
17564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
17568 \begin_layout Standard
17570 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
17571 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
17573 generally the better way of handling such issues),
17574 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
17579 comes in as a last resort.
17584 \begin_layout Standard
17585 Before we document how to
17586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
17587 use custom character style
17588 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
17589 tweak the text properties
17592 we want to issue a warning yet again:
17594 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
17596 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17604 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
17607 \begin_layout Standard
17609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
17610 use custom character styles
17611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
17612 tweak text properties
17616 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
17619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17621 \begin_inset space ~
17624 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17632 arg "dialog-show character"
17635 dialog or press the toolbar button
17638 arg "dialog-show character"
17643 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
17646 boxes in this dialog,
17647 each corresponding to a different
17648 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
17650 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
17653 property that you can choose.
17654 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
17658 \begin_inset space ~
17664 which keeps the current state of that property.
17666 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
17670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
17672 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
17677 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
17678 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
17681 \begin_layout Standard
17683 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
17685 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
17689 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
17691 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
17695 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
17697 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
17703 and their options (in addition to
17706 \begin_inset space ~
17712 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
17716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
17724 \begin_layout Labeling
17725 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17739 The possible options are:
17743 \begin_layout Labeling
17744 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17749 This is the Roman font family.
17750 Normally a serif font.
17751 It's also the default family.
17761 \begin_layout Labeling
17762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17766 \begin_inset space ~
17773 This is the Sans Serif font family.
17785 \begin_layout Labeling
17786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17793 This is the Typewriter font family.
17799 arg "font-typewriter"
17805 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
17809 \begin_layout Standard
17811 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
17812 The general differences of these families are:
17815 \begin_layout Itemize
17817 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
17822 fonts use characters with serifs.
17823 These are the small
17824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17831 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17832 The following example shows the difference:
17833 \begin_inset Newline newline
17837 \begin_inset Newline newline
17842 text without serifs
17845 \begin_inset Newline newline
17848 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17849 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17856 \begin_layout Itemize
17858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17863 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17864 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17865 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17868 \begin_layout Itemize
17870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17884 which means every character has the same width;
17886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17903 \begin_inset Newline newline
17907 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17925 \begin_inset Note Note
17928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17930 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17931 For more on phantoms see section
17932 \begin_inset space ~
17936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17938 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17949 \begin_inset Newline newline
17958 \begin_layout Labeling
17959 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17964 This corresponds to the print weight.
17969 \begin_layout Labeling
17970 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17975 This is the Medium font series.
17976 It's also the default series.
17979 \begin_layout Labeling
17980 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17987 This is the Bold font series.
18000 \begin_layout Labeling
18001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18006 As the name implies.
18011 \begin_layout Labeling
18012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18017 This is the Upright font shape.
18018 It's also the default shape.
18021 \begin_layout Labeling
18022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18032 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
18037 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
18042 s the Italic font shape
18048 \begin_layout Labeling
18049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18056 This is the Slanted font shape
18058 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18060 this is different from italic).
18063 \begin_layout Labeling
18064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18068 \begin_inset space ~
18075 This is the Small caps font shape
18082 \begin_layout Labeling
18083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18085 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18090 Alters the text color.
18091 Note that not all DVI
18092 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
18094 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18095 viewers are able to display colors.
18099 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
18101 \begin_inset space ~
18105 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18109 which means that the document default color set in
18111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18118 \begin_inset space ~
18125 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
18127 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18129 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
18131 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18226 \begin_inset Index idx
18231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18233 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18248 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
18254 \begin_layout Labeling
18255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18257 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18262 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
18263 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18264 workarea in blue to indicate the change
18265 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
18266 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
18268 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18270 \begin_inset Newline newline
18273 If you have for example,
18274 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18276 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18277 When using the spell checking (see section
18278 \begin_inset space ~
18282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18284 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18289 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18290 \begin_inset Newline newline
18293 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
18296 Exclude from Spellchecking
18299 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
18304 \begin_layout Labeling
18305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18310 Alters the size of the font.
18312 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
18314 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
18318 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
18321 numerical values here;
18322 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
18324 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
18326 but a general description of what you want to do.
18331 \begin_layout Labeling
18332 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18353 arg "font-size tiny"
18359 \begin_layout Labeling
18360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18381 arg "font-size scriptsize"
18387 \begin_layout Labeling
18388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18409 arg "font-size footnotesize"
18415 \begin_layout Labeling
18416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18437 arg "font-size small"
18443 \begin_layout Labeling
18444 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18458 It's also the default size.
18462 arg "font-size normal"
18468 \begin_layout Labeling
18469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18490 arg "font-size large"
18496 \begin_layout Labeling
18497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18518 arg "font-size larger"
18524 \begin_layout Labeling
18525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18546 arg "font-size largest"
18552 \begin_layout Labeling
18553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18574 arg "font-size huge"
18580 \begin_layout Labeling
18581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18602 arg "font-size giant"
18608 \begin_layout Labeling
18609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18614 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
18616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18635 arg "font-size increase"
18641 \begin_layout Labeling
18642 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18647 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
18649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18668 arg "font-size decrease"
18674 \begin_layout Standard
18680 don't go crazy with this feature.
18681 You should almost never need to change the font size.
18683 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
18685 This is here for fine-tuning only!
18686 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
18691 \begin_layout Standard
18693 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
18694 Another combo box allows to tweak
18701 \begin_layout Labeling
18702 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18704 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18709 Alters the text color.
18710 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
18716 which means that the document default color set in
18718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18719 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18725 \begin_inset space ~
18825 \begin_inset Index idx
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18859 \begin_layout Labeling
18860 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18862 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
18866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
18872 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
18873 change a few other things at the character level
18874 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
18875 have text passages being underlined
18879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
18880 Avoid using underlining if you can!
18881 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18882 when you could not change fonts.
18883 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18884 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18885 because some people
18889 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18896 \begin_layout Labeling
18897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18899 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
18906 This is text with emphasize on
18909 This might seem like the same as
18914 but it is actually a bit different.
18920 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
18921 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18922 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18926 \begin_layout Labeling
18927 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18929 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18934 Don't use underlining.
18939 \begin_layout Labeling
18940 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18942 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18946 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18956 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18965 arg "font-underline"
18971 \begin_inset Newline newline
18975 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18978 Avoid using underbar if you can!
18979 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18980 when you could not change fonts.
18981 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18982 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18983 because some people
18987 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18992 \begin_layout Labeling
18993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18997 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18999 \begin_inset space ~
19008 This is text with Double under
19009 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
19011 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
19020 arg "font-underunderline"
19024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
19026 \begin_inset Newline newline
19029 As we just warned you against using underbar,
19030 you can imagine what we think about double underbar
19035 \begin_layout Labeling
19036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19040 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
19042 \begin_inset space ~
19051 This is text with Wavy under
19052 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
19054 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
19063 arg "font-underwave"
19067 \begin_inset Newline newline
19070 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
19071 Keep antinausea pills handy.
19072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
19077 \begin_layout Labeling
19078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
19085 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
19091 \begin_layout Labeling
19092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19094 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
19099 Don't use strikethrough.
19102 \begin_layout Labeling
19103 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19107 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
19109 \begin_inset space ~
19113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
19121 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
19123 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
19124 Single strikethrough
19132 arg "font-strikeout"
19136 \begin_inset Newline newline
19139 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
19142 \begin_layout Labeling
19143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19145 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
19149 \begin_inset space ~
19153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
19155 \begin_inset space ~
19159 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
19167 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
19169 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
19175 \begin_inset Newline newline
19178 This is used to make text hardly readable.
19182 \begin_layout Standard
19184 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
19185 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
19188 \begin_layout Labeling
19189 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19191 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
19196 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
19197 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
19198 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
19199 \begin_inset Newline newline
19202 If you have for example,
19203 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
19205 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
19206 When using the spell checking (see section
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19213 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
19218 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
19219 \begin_inset Newline newline
19222 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
19225 Exclude from Spellchecking
19228 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
19231 \begin_layout Standard
19233 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19234 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
19235 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
19236 \begin_inset space ~
19240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19242 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
19248 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
19252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19258 \begin_layout Itemize
19260 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
19268 This is text with emphasize on
19273 \begin_layout Itemize
19277 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
19285 This is text with Noun on.
19287 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
19295 this is a logical attribute.
19296 Normally it's equivalent to
19299 \begin_inset space ~
19309 \begin_layout Standard
19310 So you have a huge number of combinations to
19311 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
19313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
19318 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
19319 chosen a new character style
19320 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
19321 applied a text property
19324 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
19327 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
19329 \begin_inset space ~
19332 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
19340 arg "dialog-show character"
19346 arg "dialog-show character"
19351 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
19355 You can activate the
19356 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
19358 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
19359 last applied properties
19361 by using the toolbar button
19364 arg "textstyle-apply"
19368 The button lets you apply
19369 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
19370 your custom character style
19371 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
19374 even when the dialog isn't visible.
19376 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
19377 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
19378 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
19379 20) most recently applied settings,
19380 from which you can select one.
19385 \begin_layout Standard
19386 To completely reset the
19387 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
19389 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
19390 text properties of a selection
19394 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
19396 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
19406 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
19411 from the menu of the toolbar button
19414 arg "textstyle-apply"
19421 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
19422 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
19423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19442 \begin_inset space ~
19456 \begin_layout Standard
19458 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19459 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
19467 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_layout Itemize
19482 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19496 which means every character has the same width;
19498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19515 \begin_inset Newline newline
19519 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 \begin_inset Note Note
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 For more on phantoms see section
19538 \begin_inset space ~
19542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19544 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
19555 \begin_inset Newline newline
19561 \begin_layout Itemize
19563 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19568 fonts use characters with serifs.
19569 These are the small
19570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19577 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
19578 The following example shows the difference:
19579 \begin_inset Newline newline
19583 \begin_inset Newline newline
19588 text without serifs
19591 \begin_inset Newline newline
19594 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
19595 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
19602 \begin_layout Itemize
19604 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19609 is not recommended for use as a base type.
19610 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
19611 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
19616 \begin_layout Standard
19618 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
19619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19626 refers to applying or removing font properties.
19627 When a property is marked for toggling in the
19630 \begin_inset space ~
19636 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
19639 apply a style with properties A,
19640 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
19643 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
19644 the text ends up with properties A,
19648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19663 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
19664 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
19665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19673 toggling behavior is up to you.
19677 \begin_inset space ~
19683 all of the left side properties are toggled;
19688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19717 \begin_inset space ~
19723 then apply the style to bold face text,
19724 the text will revert to the default series (
19725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19733 no matter how many times you apply the style.
19738 \begin_layout Standard
19740 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
19743 with the same warning once again:
19744 Do not overuse the fonts!
19746 more often than not,
19747 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
19750 \begin_layout Section
19751 Printing and Previewing
19754 \begin_layout Subsection
19758 \begin_layout Standard
19759 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
19761 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
19762 Before we tell you that,
19763 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
19764 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
19766 Additional Features
19771 \begin_layout Standard
19773 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
19776 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
19777 typesetting system,
19778 but to prevent confusion,
19779 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19782 is what you use to do your actual writing.
19785 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19786 to turn your writing into printable output.
19787 This happens in two stages:
19790 \begin_layout Enumerate
19793 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
19795 generating a file with the extension,
19797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19811 \begin_layout Enumerate
19814 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19815 to use the commands in the
19819 file to produce printable output.
19822 \begin_layout Subsection
19823 Output file formats
19824 \begin_inset Index idx
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19838 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19847 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
19849 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
19853 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
19857 \begin_inset Index idx
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
19871 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
19887 \begin_layout Standard
19888 This file type has the extension
19889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19901 It contains your document as plain text
19902 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
19904 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
19905 following the rules of the
19906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19909 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
19910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19918 \begin_layout Standard
19919 You can export your document to
19920 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
19922 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
19927 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19928 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19930 \begin_inset space ~
19937 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
19938 bibliography (section
19939 \begin_inset space ~
19943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19945 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
19951 If your document includes such material,
19954 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19955 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19957 \begin_inset space ~
19961 \begin_inset space ~
19965 \begin_inset space ~
19973 \begin_inset space ~
19977 \begin_inset space ~
19983 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19984 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19986 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19992 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19995 \begin_inset Index idx
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20020 \begin_layout Standard
20021 This file type has the extension
20022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20033 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20034 program to process your document.
20035 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
20037 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
20038 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
20039 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
20040 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
20041 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
20044 \begin_layout Standard
20045 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20046 -file using the menu
20048 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20049 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20053 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
20054 export variants are explained in section
20055 \begin_inset space ~
20059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20061 reference "subsec:Export"
20069 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20071 \begin_inset Index idx
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20095 \begin_layout Standard
20096 This file type has the extension
20097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20118 because it is completely portable;
20119 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
20120 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
20124 \begin_layout Standard
20125 DVI files do not contain images,
20126 they only link to them.
20127 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
20128 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
20129 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
20130 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
20133 \begin_layout Standard
20134 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
20136 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20137 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20142 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20143 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20145 \begin_inset space ~
20151 The latter option uses the program
20153 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20159 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20162 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20163 \begin_inset space ~
20167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20169 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20175 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20176 is still a work in progress,
20177 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20183 \begin_inset Index idx
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 \begin_layout Standard
20208 This file type has the extension
20209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20221 PostScript was developed by the company
20225 as a printer language.
20226 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
20227 PostScript can be seen as a
20228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20231 programming language
20232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20236 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 If you are interested in learning more about this,
20242 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20248 \begin_inset Index idx
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 As a result of this,
20276 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
20279 \begin_layout Standard
20280 PostScript can only contain images in the format
20281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20284 Encapsulated PostScript
20285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20302 As \SpecialChar LyX
20303 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
20304 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
20308 \begin_inset space ~
20311 images in your document,
20314 \begin_inset space ~
20317 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
20318 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
20320 So if you plan to use PostScript,
20321 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
20324 \begin_layout Standard
20325 You can export to PostScript using the menu
20327 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20328 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20336 \begin_inset Index idx
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 \begin_inset Index idx
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 \begin_layout Standard
20373 This file type has the extension
20374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20390 Portable Document Format
20391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20398 was derived from PostScript.
20399 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
20401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20409 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
20412 \begin_layout Standard
20413 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
20414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20417 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20450 Portable Network Graphics
20451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20468 You can also use any other image format,
20469 because \SpecialChar LyX
20470 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
20471 But as described in the section about PostScript,
20472 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
20473 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
20476 \begin_layout Standard
20477 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
20479 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20485 \begin_layout Description
20487 \begin_inset space ~
20490 (pdflatex) This uses the program
20494 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20497 \begin_layout Description
20499 \begin_inset space ~
20506 ) This uses the program
20508 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20511 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20514 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20523 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20524 \begin_inset space ~
20528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20530 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20536 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20537 is still a work in progress,
20538 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20542 \begin_layout Description
20544 \begin_inset space ~
20551 ) This uses the program
20556 that converts your file directly to PDF.
20562 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20563 \begin_inset space ~
20567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20569 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20575 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
20577 vertically written Japanese.
20580 \begin_layout Description
20582 \begin_inset space ~
20585 (cropped) This is the same as
20588 \begin_inset space ~
20593 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
20594 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
20595 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
20598 \begin_layout Description
20600 \begin_inset space ~
20603 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
20607 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
20610 \begin_layout Description
20612 \begin_inset space ~
20615 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
20619 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
20620 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
20624 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
20625 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
20628 \begin_layout Standard
20632 \begin_inset space ~
20641 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
20644 and works without problems.
20645 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
20646 or specific OpenType fonts,
20647 you might want to try out
20650 \begin_inset space ~
20658 \begin_inset space ~
20664 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
20671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20673 \begin_inset Index idx
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 \begin_inset Index idx
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 \begin_layout Standard
20710 This file type has the extension
20711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20723 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
20724 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
20725 When \SpecialChar LyX
20727 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
20728 For the math output you can choose in the menu
20730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20731 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20734 between different formats,
20735 which are described in section
20737 Math Output in XHTML
20742 \begin_inset space ~
20750 \begin_layout Standard
20751 XHTML output remains
20752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20760 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
20761 features are supported yet.
20765 and the World Wide Web
20770 Additional Features
20773 for more information.
20776 \begin_layout Standard
20777 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
20779 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20780 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20786 \begin_layout Subsection
20788 \begin_inset Index idx
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 \begin_layout Standard
20813 To get a look at the final version of your document,
20814 with all of the page breaks in place,
20815 the footnotes correctly numbered,
20825 or use the toolbar button
20832 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
20833 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
20834 \begin_inset space ~
20838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20840 reference "sec:File-Formats"
20845 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
20846 \begin_inset space ~
20850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20852 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
20858 Further output formats can be selected via
20860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20861 View (Other Formats)
20863 or the toolbar button
20872 \begin_layout Standard
20873 If you have changed your document,
20874 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
20876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20882 Update (Other Formats)
20888 \begin_layout Standard
20889 When you preview a file,
20890 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
20891 's temporary directory.
20892 To have a real output,
20893 export your document.
20896 \begin_layout Section
20897 A few Words about Typography
20898 \begin_inset Index idx
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 \begin_layout Subsection
20914 Dashes and Minus Signs
20915 \begin_inset Index idx
20920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 \begin_inset Index idx
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 \begin_layout Standard
20942 In \SpecialChar LyX
20945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20956 symbol comes in four variants:
20977 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20983 \begin_layout Standard
20984 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20994 height_special "totalheight"
20999 backgroundcolor "none"
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 \begin_inset Tabular
21004 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
21005 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21006 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21007 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21008 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21009 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21078 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 system key combination
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 the en dash is entered with
21110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21119 and the em dash with
21122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21135 is the Mac label for the right
21145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21158 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 system key combination or
21183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21197 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 \begin_inset Formula $-$
21218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21249 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21255 \begin_layout Standard
21256 Dashes can also be inserted with
21258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21260 \begin_inset space ~
21263 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
21271 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
21274 \begin_layout Standard
21275 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
21276 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
21277 Here are some examples:
21280 \begin_layout Enumerate
21281 line- and page-breaks
21282 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21292 \begin_layout Enumerate
21295 \begin_inset space ~
21299 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21309 \begin_layout Enumerate
21310 The em dash is used without spaces:
21313 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21323 \begin_layout Enumerate
21324 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
21328 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21338 \begin_layout Standard
21340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
21342 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
21343 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
21351 \begin_layout Subsection
21352 Dashes and Line Breaks
21353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21355 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
21362 \begin_layout Standard
21363 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
21365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21371 \begin_layout Itemize
21373 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
21374 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
21377 \begin_layout Itemize
21379 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
21382 \begin_layout Itemize
21383 In French and Spanish,
21384 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
21385 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
21388 \begin_layout Standard
21390 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
21391 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21402 allows line breaks after hyphens
21403 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
21406 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
21409 en-dashes and em-dashes.
21412 \begin_layout Enumerate
21413 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
21414 \begin_inset space ~
21417 – common in British English and generally recommended by
21419 The Elements of Typographic Style
21422 \begin_inset space ~
21425 – can be prevented using
21426 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
21428 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
21434 \begin_layout Enumerate
21435 Unwanted line breaks
21440 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
21442 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
21445 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 Prevent Hyphenation
21457 \begin_inset space ~
21473 in \SpecialChar TeX
21475 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21478 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
21480 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
21482 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21483 space does not suffice
21487 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
21492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
21495 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
21496 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
21509 \begin_layout Itemize
21511 \begin_inset space ~
21515 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21525 height_special "totalheight"
21530 backgroundcolor "none"
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 \begin_layout Itemize
21544 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21554 height_special "totalheight"
21559 backgroundcolor "none"
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21564 \begin_inset space ~
21572 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21573 \begin_inset space ~
21576 – sont très utiles.
21579 \begin_layout Itemize
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21594 un inciso con rayas—
21599 \begin_layout Standard
21600 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
21601 \begin_inset space ~
21604 – in contrast to an overfull line
21605 \begin_inset space ~
21608 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21612 \begin_layout Standard
21613 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
21614 you can select the option
21616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21617 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21618 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21619 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21624 \begin_layout Enumerate
21625 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
21626 They can be prevented using
21627 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
21629 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
21632 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
21638 \begin_layout Itemize
21640 \begin_inset space ~
21643 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21644 \begin_inset space ~
21647 – sont très utiles.
21651 \begin_layout Enumerate
21652 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
21653 \begin_inset Newline newline
21658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21659 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21661 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
21663 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
21665 \begin_inset space ~
21671 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
21673 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
21675 \begin_inset space ~
21686 \begin_layout Itemize
21687 Em-dashes without spaces—
21688 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21689 common in American English—
21690 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21691 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
21694 \begin_layout Standard
21695 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
21696 \begin_inset space ~
21700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21702 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21714 \begin_layout Enumerate
21717 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
21718 \begin_inset space ~
21722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21724 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21736 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
21739 \begin_layout Standard
21740 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
21742 \begin_inset space ~
21746 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
21748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21755 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
21763 \begin_layout Standard
21764 Since \SpecialChar LyX
21766 \begin_inset space ~
21770 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21771 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
21773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21780 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
21785 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 The behavior was changed since
21795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21813 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
21814 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
21822 \begin_layout Standard
21825 \begin_inset space ~
21833 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
21835 \begin_inset space ~
21838 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
21841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21842 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21843 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21844 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21846 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
21851 If you used both literal and
21852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21859 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
21861 \begin_inset space ~
21865 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
21868 \begin_layout Subsection
21870 \begin_inset Index idx
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21884 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
21891 \begin_layout Standard
21892 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
21893 but automatically in the output.
21894 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21900 \begin_inset Index idx
21905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 following the rules of the document language.
21924 does not hyphenate text in the
21928 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
21931 \begin_layout Standard
21933 hyphenates almost perfectly;
21934 it only has problems with text in the
21938 font and with unusual constructs,
21940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21948 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
21949 cannot break a word correctly,
21950 you can set hyphenation points manually.
21951 This is done with the menu
21953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21954 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21956 \begin_inset space ~
21963 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420767
21964 Note that adding hyphenation points disables the default ones:
21965 The word will no longer break at the places it previously would have.
21967 \change_inserted -712698321 1697436627
21970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21977 that are common in word processors,
21979 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420767
21981 \change_deleted -584632292 1697420769
21983 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420770
21987 \change_deleted -584632292 1697420699
21989 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420772
21992 hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21994 If no hyphenation is necessary
21995 \change_inserted -712698321 1697437057
21996 or the automatic hyphenation is disabled
22001 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420971
22005 \begin_layout Standard
22007 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22008 If there is a word you use often that \SpecialChar LaTeX
22009 does not hyphenate correctly,
22010 you can tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
22011 how to hyphenate it by adding
22012 \change_deleted -712698321 1697438612
22014 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438615
22016 \change_deleted -712698321 1697439121
22018 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22020 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439144
22022 \begin_inset Flex Code
22025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 \change_inserted -712698321 1697440886
22030 hyphenation{<patterns>}
22038 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22040 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438635
22041 which takes as its argument one or more words with their hyphenation points marked by a hyphen
22042 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22045 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438465
22047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22051 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22054 \begin_inset Flex Code
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421061
22062 hyphenation{dis-quo-ta-tion
22063 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438644
22065 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421061
22074 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439035
22075 You can also use this to globally prevent hyphenation of a word,
22077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22082 \begin_inset Flex Code
22085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22087 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439080
22090 hyphenation{unbroken}
22098 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22100 If there are a lot of these
22101 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439099
22102 hyphenation exceptions
22103 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22105 you can collect them in a single file (say,
22107 \begin_inset Flex Code
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421096
22120 ) and then import the file via:
22122 \begin_inset Flex Code
22125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421113
22130 usepackage{myhyphens}
22138 Make sure to put the file somewhere \SpecialChar LaTeX
22140 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439496
22143 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
22151 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22153 \change_inserted -712698321 1697440371
22157 \begin_layout Standard
22159 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441110
22163 \begin_inset Flex Code
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 \change_inserted -712698321 1697440909
22171 hyphenation{<patterns>}
22178 is language-insensitive.
22179 This is not always desired,
22185 \begin_inset Quotes els
22189 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22192 ) which can be hyphenated as
22196 as opposed to English
22200 that must not be hyphenated.
22202 the language packages
22210 provide specific variants of the command that are restricted to individual languages or language varieties:
22213 \begin_layout Itemize
22215 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441197
22222 \begin_inset Flex Code
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441197
22230 babelhyphenation[<language 1>,
22243 \begin_layout Itemize
22245 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441204
22252 \begin_inset Flex Code
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22257 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441204
22260 pghyphenation[<language options>]{<language>}{<patterns>}
22270 \begin_layout Standard
22272 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441248
22274 depending on which language package you are using:
22277 \begin_layout Itemize
22279 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441311
22280 \begin_inset Flex Code
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22285 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441767
22288 babelhyphenation[german,ngerman,austrian,naustrian,swissgerman,
22289 \begin_inset Newline newline
22292 nswissgerman]{Ma-de}
22302 \begin_layout Itemize
22304 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441342
22305 \begin_inset Flex Code
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441342
22313 pghyphenation{german}{Ma-de}
22325 \begin_layout Standard
22327 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441379
22328 in order to define the hyphenation points for all German varieties,
22332 \begin_layout Itemize
22334 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441467
22335 \begin_inset Flex Code
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441467
22343 babelhyphenation[naustrian]{Ma-de}
22353 \begin_layout Itemize
22355 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441476
22356 \begin_inset Flex Code
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22361 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441476
22364 pghyphenation[variant=austrian]{german}{Ma-de}
22374 \begin_layout Standard
22376 \change_inserted -712698321 1697442003
22377 in order to define them only for the Austrian variety of German.
22380 \begin_layout Standard
22382 \change_inserted -712698321 1697442124
22383 These commands only work after the language package has been loaded,
22384 which is usually after the user preamble.
22385 So it is advised that you embrace them in
22386 \begin_inset Flex Code
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 \change_inserted -712698321 1697442087
22394 AtBeginDocument{\SpecialChar ldots
22403 which causes them to be issued at the end of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22407 \begin_layout Standard
22408 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
22409 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
22410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22419 would then see the hyphen
22420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22427 as a line break possibility.
22428 A line break at this point would look ugly.
22429 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
22431 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
22433 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
22438 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22439 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
22441 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
22443 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
22448 ) or put it into a makebox as described in
22449 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421188
22454 Prevent Hyphenation
22459 \begin_inset space ~
22467 \begin_layout Subsection
22469 \begin_inset Index idx
22474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22484 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
22485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22487 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
22494 \begin_layout Standard
22495 When \SpecialChar LyX
22496 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
22497 to generate the final version of your document,
22499 automatically distinguishes between words,
22504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22507 appropriate amount of space.
22508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22511 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
22512 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
22515 \begin_layout Standard
22517 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
22519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22530 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
22531 it's the end of a sentence;
22532 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
22533 it's an abbreviation.
22536 \begin_layout Standard
22537 Here are some examples of
22541 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
22544 \begin_layout Itemize
22549 \begin_layout Itemize
22554 \begin_layout Standard
22555 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
22558 \begin_layout Itemize
22560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22564 this is too much space!
22567 \begin_layout Itemize
22572 \begin_layout Standard
22573 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
22576 \begin_layout Standard
22577 To fix this problem,
22578 use one of the following:
22581 \begin_layout Enumerate
22585 \begin_inset space ~
22590 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
22591 \begin_inset space ~
22595 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
22597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22599 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
22605 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
22607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22609 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
22617 \begin_inset Index idx
22622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22641 \begin_layout Enumerate
22645 \begin_inset space ~
22650 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
22651 \begin_inset space ~
22655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22657 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
22663 \begin_inset Index idx
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22687 \begin_layout Enumerate
22691 \begin_inset space ~
22695 \begin_inset space ~
22699 \begin_inset space ~
22706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22708 \begin_inset space ~
22713 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
22714 This function is also bound to
22717 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
22723 \begin_layout Standard
22724 With the corrections,
22725 our earlier examples look like this:
22728 \begin_layout Itemize
22730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22734 \begin_inset space \space{}
22737 this is too much space!
22740 \begin_layout Itemize
22741 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
22745 \begin_layout Standard
22746 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
22747 If your language is such a language,
22748 you don't need to worry,
22749 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
22750 will take care of this.
22753 \begin_layout Standard
22754 For those that do need to bother,
22755 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
22759 \begin_inset space ~
22765 feature described in the section
22767 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
22772 Additional Features
22777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22779 \begin_inset Index idx
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 \begin_inset Index idx
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22808 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22825 \begin_layout Standard
22827 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
22829 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
22830 and use a closing mark at the end.
22833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22841 The keyboard character,
22847 generates this automatically.
22850 \begin_layout Standard
22851 You can specify what character the
22855 key produces by using the submenu
22861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22865 \begin_inset Index idx
22870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 dialog and switching the
22890 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
22891 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
22893 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
22895 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
22899 \begin_inset space ~
22905 \begin_layout Labeling
22906 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22918 \begin_inset space ~
22922 \begin_inset space ~
22926 \begin_inset Quotes els
22930 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22944 \begin_inset Quotes els
22948 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22951 quotation marks (as common,
22953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22960 \begin_layout Labeling
22961 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22964 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22968 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22972 \begin_inset space ~
22976 \begin_inset space ~
22980 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22984 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22990 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22994 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22998 \begin_inset Quotes sls
23002 \begin_inset Quotes srs
23005 quotation marks (as common,
23007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23014 \begin_layout Labeling
23015 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23018 \begin_inset Quotes gld
23022 \begin_inset Quotes grd
23026 \begin_inset space ~
23030 \begin_inset space ~
23034 \begin_inset Quotes gls
23038 \begin_inset Quotes grs
23044 \begin_inset Quotes gld
23048 \begin_inset Quotes grd
23052 \begin_inset Quotes gls
23056 \begin_inset Quotes grs
23059 quotation marks (as common,
23061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23068 \begin_layout Labeling
23069 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23072 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23076 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23080 \begin_inset space ~
23084 \begin_inset space ~
23088 \begin_inset Quotes pls
23092 \begin_inset Quotes prs
23098 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23102 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23106 \begin_inset Quotes pls
23110 \begin_inset Quotes prs
23113 quotation marks (as common,
23115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23122 \begin_layout Labeling
23123 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23126 \begin_inset Quotes cld
23130 \begin_inset Quotes crd
23134 \begin_inset space ~
23138 \begin_inset space ~
23142 \begin_inset Quotes cls
23146 \begin_inset Quotes crs
23152 \begin_inset Quotes cld
23156 \begin_inset Quotes crd
23160 \begin_inset Quotes cls
23164 \begin_inset Quotes crs
23167 quotation marks (as common,
23169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23176 \begin_layout Labeling
23177 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23180 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23184 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23188 \begin_inset space ~
23192 \begin_inset space ~
23196 \begin_inset Quotes als
23200 \begin_inset Quotes ars
23206 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23210 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23214 \begin_inset Quotes als
23218 \begin_inset Quotes ars
23221 quotation marks (as common,
23223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23230 \begin_layout Labeling
23231 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23234 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23238 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23242 \begin_inset space ~
23246 \begin_inset space ~
23250 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23254 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23260 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23264 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23268 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23272 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23275 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
23278 \begin_layout Labeling
23279 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23282 \begin_inset Quotes bld
23286 \begin_inset Quotes brd
23290 \begin_inset space ~
23294 \begin_inset space ~
23298 \begin_inset Quotes bls
23302 \begin_inset Quotes brs
23308 \begin_inset Quotes bld
23312 \begin_inset Quotes brd
23316 \begin_inset Quotes bls
23320 \begin_inset Quotes brs
23323 quotation marks (as common,
23325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23332 \begin_layout Labeling
23333 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23336 \begin_inset Quotes fld
23340 \begin_inset Quotes frd
23344 \begin_inset space ~
23348 \begin_inset space ~
23352 \begin_inset Quotes fls
23356 \begin_inset Quotes frs
23362 \begin_inset Quotes fld
23366 \begin_inset Quotes frd
23370 \begin_inset Quotes fls
23374 \begin_inset Quotes frs
23377 quotation marks (as common,
23379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23386 \begin_layout Labeling
23387 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23390 \begin_inset Quotes ild
23394 \begin_inset Quotes ird
23398 \begin_inset space ~
23402 \begin_inset space ~
23406 \begin_inset Quotes ils
23410 \begin_inset Quotes irs
23416 \begin_inset Quotes ild
23420 \begin_inset Quotes ird
23424 \begin_inset Quotes ils
23428 \begin_inset Quotes irs
23431 quotation marks (another style common in France)
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
23437 since these look identical to the inner marks.
23438 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
23446 \begin_layout Labeling
23447 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23450 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23454 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23458 \begin_inset space ~
23462 \begin_inset space ~
23466 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23470 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23476 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23480 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23484 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23488 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23491 quotation marks (as common,
23493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23500 \begin_layout Labeling
23501 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23504 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23508 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23512 \begin_inset space ~
23516 \begin_inset space ~
23520 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23524 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23530 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23534 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23538 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23542 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23545 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
23546 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
23550 \begin_layout Labeling
23551 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23553 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
23556 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23560 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23564 \begin_inset space ~
23568 \begin_inset space ~
23572 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23576 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23584 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23592 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23600 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23608 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23613 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23618 \begin_layout Labeling
23619 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23620 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23628 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23634 \begin_inset space ~
23638 \begin_inset space ~
23644 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23652 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23656 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23660 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23664 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23668 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23671 quotation marks (as common,
23673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23683 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
23684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23686 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
23692 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23700 \begin_layout Labeling
23701 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23702 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23710 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23716 \begin_inset space ~
23720 \begin_inset space ~
23726 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23734 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23738 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23742 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23746 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23750 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23753 quotation marks (as common,
23755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23759 in North Korea and China)
23760 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23762 \begin_inset script superscript
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23769 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
23785 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
23790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23797 \change_inserted 1064312605 1690963146
23801 \begin_layout Labeling
23802 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23804 \change_inserted 1064312605 1690963188
23807 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23811 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23815 \begin_inset space ~
23819 \begin_inset space ~
23823 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23827 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23833 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23839 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23845 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23851 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23856 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23861 \begin_layout Standard
23862 Inner quotation marks
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23867 In many writing cultures,
23868 these are single quotation marks.
23869 But as the British and French styles show,
23870 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
23871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23878 does not necessarily mean
23879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23887 This is why we call them
23888 \begin_inset Quotes els
23892 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23908 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
23910 \begin_inset Quotes els
23914 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23917 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
23920 arg "quote-insert inner"
23925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23931 \begin_layout Standard
23933 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
23935 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
23936 even if the document-wide style changes.
23937 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
23938 If you check the setting
23940 Use dynamic quotation marks
23944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23945 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23950 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
23951 they appear in a special color).
23952 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
23953 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
23954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23958 if your publisher requests a different style).
23961 \begin_layout Standard
23962 Individual quotation marks (i.
23963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23967 their level [inner,
23971 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
23974 \begin_layout Subsection
23976 \begin_inset Index idx
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23983 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 \begin_inset Index idx
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24022 name "subsec:Ligatures"
24029 \begin_layout Standard
24030 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
24031 These groups are known as
24036 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
24037 knows about ligatures,
24038 your documents will contain them too in the output.
24039 Here are the standard ligatures:
24042 \begin_layout Itemize
24046 \begin_layout Itemize
24050 \begin_layout Itemize
24054 \begin_layout Itemize
24058 \begin_layout Itemize
24062 \begin_layout Standard
24063 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
24066 \begin_layout Standard
24068 you don't want a ligature in a word.
24069 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
24071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24078 it looks really weird in compound words,
24080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24095 To break a ligature,
24098 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24099 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
24101 \begin_inset space ~
24108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24119 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
24121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24136 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
24138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24144 \begin_layout Subsection
24146 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
24148 \begin_inset Index idx
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 \begin_layout Standard
24176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24177 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
24182 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
24185 \begin_layout Description
24187 The name of the game.
24190 \begin_layout Description
24192 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
24196 \begin_layout Description
24198 The \SpecialChar TeX
24199 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
24203 \begin_layout Description
24204 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
24205 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
24209 \begin_layout Standard
24210 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24216 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
24220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24224 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
24225 world to give programs geek version numbers.
24226 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
24227 converges to the number
24228 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
24232 The actual version is
24233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24242 the previous one was
24243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24254 \begin_layout Subsection
24256 \begin_inset Index idx
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24263 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 \begin_layout Standard
24281 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
24282 As you can see in the example below,
24283 it looks better when the space is smaller.
24285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24292 for units use the menu
24294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24295 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
24297 \begin_inset space ~
24305 arg "space-insert thin"
24311 \begin_layout Standard
24312 Here is an example to show the differences:
24315 \begin_layout Standard
24316 \begin_inset Tabular
24317 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
24318 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24319 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
24320 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
24322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 \begin_inset space ~
24331 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
24339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24343 space between number and unit
24350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24359 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
24367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 half space between number and unit
24384 \begin_layout Subsection
24386 \begin_inset Index idx
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24410 \begin_layout Standard
24411 In the early days of word processors,
24412 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
24413 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
24414 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
24415 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
24416 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
24417 These bits of text became known as
24428 \begin_layout Standard
24431 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
24432 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
24433 But what about widows and orphans,
24434 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
24435 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
24436 governing page breaks,
24437 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
24438 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
24439 you can add the commands
24440 \begin_inset Newline newline
24448 \begin_inset Newline newline
24456 \begin_inset Newline newline
24459 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24460 preamble of your document to avoid them.
24461 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
24463 \begin_inset space ~
24467 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24469 key "latexcompanion"
24475 \begin_inset space ~
24479 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24486 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
24487 's page break mechanism.
24490 \begin_layout Chapter
24494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24496 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
24503 \begin_layout Standard
24504 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24507 \begin_inset space ~
24513 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24516 \begin_layout Section
24518 \begin_inset Index idx
24523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24539 \begin_layout Standard
24541 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
24544 \begin_layout Description
24547 \begin_inset space ~
24550 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
24551 \begin_inset Newline newline
24555 \begin_inset Note Note
24558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
24567 \begin_layout Description
24568 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
24569 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24572 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
24573 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
24575 \begin_inset space ~
24581 \begin_inset Newline newline
24585 \begin_inset Note Comment
24588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24589 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
24598 \begin_layout Description
24600 \begin_inset space ~
24603 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
24605 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
24607 \begin_inset space ~
24613 \begin_inset Newline newline
24617 \begin_inset Newline newline
24621 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24630 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
24631 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
24636 of a comment that appears in the output.
24642 \begin_inset Newline newline
24646 \begin_inset Newline newline
24649 As you can see in the example,
24650 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
24653 \begin_layout Standard
24654 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
24662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24666 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
24669 \begin_layout Section
24671 \begin_inset Index idx
24676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24685 name "sec:Footnotes"
24692 \begin_layout Standard
24694 uses boxes to display footnotes:
24695 When you insert a footnote using the menu
24697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24700 or the toolbar button
24703 arg "footnote-insert"
24717 \begin_inset Graphics
24718 filename clipart/footnote.png
24727 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24728 's representation of your footnote.
24738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24762 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
24763 Clicking on the box label again will close
24776 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
24777 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
24792 \begin_layout Standard
24793 Here is an example footnote:
24801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24802 To close a footnote,
24803 click on the footnote box label.
24811 \begin_layout Standard
24812 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
24813 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
24814 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
24815 according to the document class.
24817 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
24818 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24824 ey are described in the
24827 \begin_inset space ~
24835 \begin_layout Section
24837 \begin_inset Index idx
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24851 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
24858 \begin_layout Standard
24859 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
24861 When you insert a margin note via the menu
24863 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24865 \begin_inset space ~
24870 or the toolbar button
24873 arg "marginalnote-insert"
24893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24900 appearing within your text.
24901 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24902 's representation of your margin
24911 \begin_layout Standard
24912 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
24916 \begin_inset Marginal
24919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24921 This is a marginal note.
24929 \begin_layout Standard
24930 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
24931 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
24932 right on odd pages.
24935 \begin_layout Standard
24936 For further information about marginal notes see the section
24939 \begin_inset space ~
24947 \begin_inset space ~
24955 \begin_layout Section
24956 Graphics and Images
24957 \begin_inset Index idx
24962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24969 \begin_inset Index idx
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24983 name "sec:Graphics"
24990 \begin_layout Standard
24991 To insert an image in your document,
24992 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
24995 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25004 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
25007 \begin_layout Standard
25008 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
25013 tab allows you to choose your image file.
25014 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
25015 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
25016 \begin_inset space ~
25020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25022 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
25030 \begin_layout Standard
25035 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
25036 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
25039 \begin_inset space ~
25043 \begin_inset space ~
25052 \begin_inset space ~
25056 \begin_inset space ~
25060 \begin_inset space ~
25065 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
25066 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
25073 \begin_layout Standard
25077 \begin_inset space ~
25081 \begin_inset space ~
25086 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
25087 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
25089 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
25094 \begin_inset space ~
25099 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
25100 only a frame with the image size is printed.
25103 \begin_layout Standard
25104 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
25105 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
25106 This is an example image within a separate,
25107 horizontally centered paragraph:
25110 \begin_layout Standard
25112 \begin_inset Graphics
25113 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
25121 \begin_layout Standard
25122 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
25123 you have to put the image into a float,
25125 \begin_inset space ~
25129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25131 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25139 \begin_layout Subsection
25141 \begin_inset Index idx
25146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25148 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25165 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
25172 \begin_layout Standard
25173 You can insert images in any known file format.
25174 But as we explained in section
25175 \begin_inset space ~
25179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25181 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
25187 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
25189 therefore uses the program
25193 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
25194 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
25195 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
25196 \begin_inset space ~
25200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25202 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
25210 \begin_layout Standard
25211 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
25214 \begin_layout Description
25216 \begin_inset space ~
25219 images consist of pixel values,
25220 often in a compressed form.
25221 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
25222 Well-known bitmap image formats are
25223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25226 Graphics Interchange Format
25227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25244 \begin_inset Index idx
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25270 Portable Network Graphics
25271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25288 \begin_inset Index idx
25293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25295 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25314 Joint Photographic Experts Group
25315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25344 \begin_inset Index idx
25349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25368 \begin_layout Description
25370 \begin_inset space ~
25373 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
25374 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
25375 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
25376 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
25377 \begin_inset Newline newline
25380 Scalable image formats can be
25381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25384 Scalable Vector Graphics
25385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25402 \begin_inset Index idx
25407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25409 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25428 Encapsulated PostScript
25429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25446 \begin_inset Index idx
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25453 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25472 Portable Document Format
25473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25490 \begin_inset Index idx
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25511 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
25512 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
25516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25517 In the case of PDF,
25518 the original image is additionally compressed.
25526 \begin_layout Standard
25527 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
25535 \begin_layout Subsection
25536 Grouping of Image Settings
25537 \begin_inset Index idx
25542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25561 \begin_layout Standard
25562 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
25563 Images within such a group share their settings,
25564 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
25565 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
25568 \begin_layout Standard
25569 A new group can be set by pressing the button
25572 \begin_inset space ~
25576 \begin_inset space ~
25588 \begin_inset space ~
25592 \begin_inset space ~
25598 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
25601 \begin_layout Section
25603 \begin_inset Index idx
25608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25624 \begin_layout Standard
25625 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
25628 arg "tabular-insert"
25633 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25637 A dialog will appear,
25638 asking you for the number of rows and columns
25639 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
25641 and you can select a specific (border) style
25644 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
25645 This separation appears due to a double line:
25646 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
25647 Here is an example table:
25650 \begin_layout Standard
25652 \begin_inset Tabular
25653 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
25654 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25655 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25656 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25657 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25658 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25852 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
25856 \begin_layout Standard
25858 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
25859 This corresponds to the
25860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25867 table style listed in the style selection.
25870 \begin_layout Standard
25872 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
25873 Other available styles include:
25876 \begin_layout Itemize
25878 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
25880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25887 which looks line the above table,
25888 but without the first row being separated via double line,
25891 \begin_layout Itemize
25893 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
25894 a border-less table with no lines at all,
25897 \begin_layout Itemize
25899 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
25901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25908 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
25919 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
25920 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
25925 \begin_layout Standard
25927 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
25928 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
25930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25931 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25935 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
25936 you should alter this setting.
25939 \begin_layout Subsection
25943 \begin_layout Standard
25944 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
25946 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
25950 This brings up the table dialog.
25951 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
25952 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
25953 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
25954 This means that if you select more cells,
25955 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
25958 \begin_layout Standard
25959 In addition to the table dialog,
25963 \begin_inset space ~
25968 helps you in setting table properties.
25969 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
25972 \begin_layout Standard
25976 \begin_inset space ~
25981 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
25982 If you add a row or column,
25983 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
25984 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
25985 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
25987 \begin_inset space ~
25991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25993 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
26001 \begin_layout Standard
26002 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
26011 This will merge the cells to
26016 spread over more than one column/row.
26017 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
26018 so that the alignment,
26020 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
26021 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
26024 \begin_layout Standard
26026 \begin_inset Tabular
26027 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
26028 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
26029 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26030 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
26031 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
26032 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26043 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26052 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26128 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26163 \begin_layout Standard
26164 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
26165 -arguments for the table.
26166 They are necessary for special table formatting,
26167 such as the multirow cells,
26168 explained in the chapter
26175 \begin_inset space ~
26181 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
26182 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
26183 but are visible in the output.
26186 \begin_layout Standard
26187 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26196 Most DVI-viewers are
26200 able to display rotations.
26208 \begin_layout Standard
26213 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
26218 adds lines for all cell borders.
26221 \begin_layout Subsection
26223 \begin_inset Index idx
26228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26230 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26245 \begin_inset Index idx
26250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26259 \begin_layout Standard
26260 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
26261 you can use the option
26264 \begin_inset space ~
26268 \begin_inset space ~
26276 \begin_inset space ~
26281 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
26282 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
26285 \begin_layout Description
26291 The current row and all rows above,
26292 that don't have any special options defined,
26293 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
26294 Except for the first page,
26298 \begin_inset space ~
26306 \begin_layout Description
26310 \begin_inset space ~
26316 The current row and all rows above,
26317 that don't have any special options defined,
26318 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
26321 \begin_layout Description
26327 The current row and all rows below,
26328 that don't have any special options defined,
26329 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
26330 except for the last page,
26334 \begin_inset space ~
26342 \begin_layout Description
26346 \begin_inset space ~
26352 The current row and all rows below,
26353 that don't have any special options defined,
26354 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
26357 \begin_layout Description
26359 The first row is reset as a single column.
26360 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
26362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26366 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
26369 \begin_inset space ~
26377 \begin_layout Standard
26378 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
26379 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
26380 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
26381 the others will be defined as
26387 first means first in this order:
26392 \begin_inset space ~
26406 \begin_inset space ~
26412 see the following longtable to see how it works:
26415 \begin_layout Standard
26417 \begin_inset Tabular
26418 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
26419 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
26420 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
26421 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26422 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26423 <row endfirsthead="true">
26424 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26430 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
26435 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26444 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26454 <row endfirsthead="true">
26455 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26466 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26475 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 <row endhead="true">
26488 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26499 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26508 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26518 <row endhead="true">
26519 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26539 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26551 <row endfoot="true">
26552 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26563 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26603 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27545 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27554 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
27557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27563 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27574 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27729 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27791 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27822 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27853 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27946 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27977 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28132 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28194 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28225 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28257 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28288 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28319 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28350 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28381 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28412 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28443 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28474 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28505 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28535 <row endlastfoot="true">
28536 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28547 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
28550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28556 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28573 \begin_layout Subsection
28575 \begin_inset Index idx
28580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28582 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28599 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
28606 \begin_layout Standard
28607 A table cell can contain text,
28611 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
28612 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
28613 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
28619 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
28622 \begin_layout Standard
28623 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
28624 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
28625 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
28629 \begin_layout Standard
28631 \begin_inset Tabular
28632 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
28633 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28634 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28635 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
28636 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28656 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28725 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28781 This is longer now.
28786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28837 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28838 This is longer now.
28843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28869 \begin_layout Standard
28870 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
28871 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
28875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28876 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
28881 Selection with the mouse or with
28885 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
28886 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
28889 \begin_layout Section
28891 \begin_inset Index idx
28896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28912 \begin_layout Subsection
28916 \begin_layout Standard
28917 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
28918 which doesn't have a fixed location.
28920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28927 forward or backward a page or two,
28928 to wherever it fits best.
28936 \begin_inset space ~
28942 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
28945 \begin_layout Standard
28946 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
28947 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
28948 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
28949 every float can be referenced in the text.
28950 Floats are therefore numbered.
28951 Referencing is described in section
28952 \begin_inset space ~
28956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28958 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28966 \begin_layout Standard
28970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28974 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
28975 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
28976 After the label you can insert the caption text.
28977 \begin_inset Index idx
28982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28984 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28998 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
28999 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
29000 -document readable,
29001 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
29002 A closed float box looks like this:
29004 \begin_inset Graphics
29005 filename clipart/float.png
29010 – a gray button with a red label.
29013 \begin_layout Standard
29014 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
29015 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
29018 \begin_layout Subsection
29020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29022 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
29027 \begin_inset Index idx
29032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29034 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29051 \begin_layout Standard
29053 \begin_inset space ~
29057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29059 reference "fig:A-star-in"
29064 was created using the menu
29066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29067 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
29073 arg "float-insert figure"
29077 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
29079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29085 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
29089 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
29091 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29093 \begin_inset space ~
29101 arg "layout-paragraph"
29107 \begin_layout Standard
29108 \begin_inset Float figure
29115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29117 \begin_inset Graphics
29118 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
29127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29128 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29133 name "fig:A-star-in"
29150 \begin_layout Standard
29151 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
29152 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
29154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29163 ) and refer to it using the menu
29165 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29171 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29175 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
29176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29185 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29186 will reposition the floats in the final document,
29188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29196 For more about cross-references,
29198 \begin_inset space ~
29202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29204 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29212 \begin_layout Standard
29213 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
29214 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
29215 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
29216 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
29217 \begin_inset space ~
29221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29223 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29230 \begin_inset space ~
29234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29236 reference "fig:Two-images"
29241 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
29242 You can also set the images one below the other.
29244 \begin_inset space ~
29248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29250 reference "fig:Undefinable"
29256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29258 reference "fig:Star"
29263 are the subfigures.
29266 \begin_layout Standard
29267 \begin_inset Float figure
29274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29275 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29279 \begin_inset Float figure
29286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29287 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29292 name "fig:Undefinable"
29304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29305 \begin_inset Graphics
29306 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
29318 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29322 \begin_inset Float figure
29329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29330 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29348 \begin_inset Graphics
29349 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
29361 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29368 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29373 name "fig:Two-images"
29390 \begin_layout Subsection
29392 \begin_inset Index idx
29397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29399 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29416 \begin_layout Standard
29417 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
29419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29420 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
29423 or the toolbar button
29426 arg "float-insert table"
29430 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
29432 \begin_inset space ~
29436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29438 reference "tab:Table-float"
29446 \begin_layout Standard
29447 \begin_inset Float table
29454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29455 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29460 name "tab:Table-float"
29472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29474 \begin_inset Tabular
29475 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
29476 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29478 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29479 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29606 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
29614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29627 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29630 \end{array}\right]$
29638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29651 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
29672 \begin_layout Subsection
29674 \begin_inset Index idx
29679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29681 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29698 \begin_layout Standard
29700 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
29701 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
29702 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
29703 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
29710 \begin_inset space ~
29718 \begin_layout Section
29720 \begin_inset Index idx
29725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29734 \begin_layout Standard
29736 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
29739 all the usual rules of indentation,
29742 \begin_inset space \space{}
29748 \begin_layout Standard
29749 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
29750 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
29752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29756 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29761 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29771 height_special "totalheight"
29776 backgroundcolor "none"
29779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29782 This is a minipage.
29783 The text is set in an italic style.
29786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29789 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
29797 \begin_layout Standard
29798 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29801 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
29806 as described in section
29807 \begin_inset space ~
29811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29813 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
29819 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29825 \begin_layout Standard
29826 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29836 height_special "totalheight"
29841 backgroundcolor "none"
29844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29845 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29846 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29852 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29856 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29866 height_special "totalheight"
29871 backgroundcolor "none"
29874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29875 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29876 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29884 \begin_layout Standard
29885 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29891 \begin_layout Standard
29892 When you right-click on a minipage box,
29893 you can transform the box to another box type.
29894 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
29901 \begin_inset space ~
29909 \begin_layout Chapter
29910 Mathematical Formulas
29911 \begin_inset Index idx
29916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29923 \begin_inset Index idx
29928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29930 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
29933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29947 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
29954 \begin_layout Standard
29955 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
29960 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
29963 \begin_layout Section
29965 \begin_inset Index idx
29970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29972 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29990 To create a math formula,
29991 you can just click on the toolbar icon
30004 That will create a little blue rectangle,
30005 with purple markers around its corners.
30006 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
30007 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
30008 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
30010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30016 \begin_layout Standard
30017 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
30020 \begin_inset space ~
30026 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
30029 \begin_layout Standard
30030 There are two main types of formulas,
30031 inline formulas and display formulas.
30032 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
30036 \begin_layout Standard
30037 This is a line with an inline formula
30038 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
30044 \begin_layout Standard
30045 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
30047 \begin_inset Formula
30054 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30059 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30077 followed by a space,
30078 in a formula will create the Greek letter
30079 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
30083 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
30086 \begin_inset space ~
30094 \begin_layout Subsection
30095 Navigating in Formulas
30096 \begin_inset Index idx
30101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30103 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30120 \begin_layout Standard
30121 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
30123 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
30124 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
30129 will leave a formula construct (a square root
30130 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
30135 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
30140 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
30143 \end{array}\right]$
30151 will leave the formula,
30152 placing the cursor after the formula.
30157 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
30159 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
30162 \begin_layout Standard
30168 printed in this document as
30169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30173 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30181 seems to do nothing in a formula,
30182 since it does not add a space between characters,
30183 but it does exit a nested structure.
30185 you have to be careful about using
30192 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
30201 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30211 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30215 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30221 since in the latter case only the
30224 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
30229 will be under the square root sign:
30231 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
30237 \begin_layout Standard
30238 You can leave many parts of a formula,
30240 partially filled in,
30242 \begin_inset Formula
30244 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
30253 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
30254 or a subscript with nothing in it,
30255 the results will be unpredictable,
30256 but most constructs don't mind.
30259 \begin_layout Subsection
30263 \begin_layout Standard
30264 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
30265 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
30270 and a cursor movement key to select text.
30271 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
30273 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
30274 That text can then be cut or copied,
30275 and then pasted within any formula,
30276 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
30280 \begin_layout Subsection
30281 Exponents and Subscripts
30282 \begin_inset Index idx
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30289 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30304 \begin_inset Index idx
30309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30311 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30328 \begin_layout Standard
30329 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
30332 arg "math-superscript"
30338 arg "math-subscript"
30342 but it is often much easier to use a command.
30344 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
30351 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30361 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
30368 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
30373 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
30380 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30386 If you use characters in the superscript,
30387 that could be accented with the circumflex
30388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30396 you have to use an extra
30400 to separate the circumflex and the character.
30403 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
30410 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30416 Subscripts are similar:
30418 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
30425 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30433 \begin_layout Subsection
30435 \begin_inset Index idx
30440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30459 \begin_layout Standard
30460 Create a fraction either with the command
30466 or by using the icon
30469 arg "math-insert \\frac"
30475 \begin_inset space ~
30481 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
30482 The cursor is above the fraction line.
30483 To move it to the bottom,
30495 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
30496 as this example shows:
30497 \begin_inset Formula
30499 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
30502 \end{array}\right)}\right]
30510 \begin_layout Subsection
30512 \begin_inset Index idx
30517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30519 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30536 \begin_layout Standard
30537 Roots can be created using the
30540 \begin_inset space ~
30548 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
30554 arg "math-insert \\root"
30576 you can produce roots of higher orders,
30584 always produces a square root.
30587 \begin_layout Subsection
30588 Operators with Limits
30589 \begin_inset Index idx
30594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30596 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30611 \begin_inset Index idx
30616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30618 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30635 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30642 \begin_layout Standard
30644 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
30648 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
30651 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
30652 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30653 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
30654 directly after the symbol.
30655 The sum operator will automatically place its
30656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30663 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
30664 and to the side in inline formulas,
30666 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
30671 \begin_inset Formula
30673 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
30680 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
30683 \begin_layout Standard
30684 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
30685 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
30687 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30688 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30690 \begin_inset space ~
30694 \begin_inset space ~
30708 \begin_layout Standard
30709 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
30710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30719 \begin_inset Index idx
30724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30726 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30741 \begin_inset Formula
30743 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
30748 which will place the
30749 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
30753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30761 In inline formulas it looks like this:
30763 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
30769 \begin_layout Standard
30770 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
30777 Have a look at section
30778 \begin_inset space ~
30782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30784 reference "subsec:Functions"
30789 for an explanation of function macros.
30792 \begin_layout Subsection
30794 \begin_inset Index idx
30799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30801 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30818 \begin_layout Standard
30819 Most math symbols can be found in the
30822 \begin_inset space ~
30827 under one of several categories;
30848 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
30851 \begin_layout Standard
30852 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30853 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
30854 you don't have to use the
30857 \begin_inset space ~
30863 you can type the command directly into the formula.
30865 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
30868 \begin_layout Subsection
30870 \begin_inset Index idx
30875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30877 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30894 \begin_layout Standard
30895 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30901 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
30907 \begin_inset space ~
30915 arg "math-insert \\space"
30919 This generates a small space,
30920 and shows a small marker on the screen.
30928 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
30931 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30933 \begin_inset Graphics
30934 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
30939 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
30940 With every space enter the size will be changed.
30941 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
30943 because they are negative spaces.
30944 Here are two examples:
30947 \begin_layout Standard
30958 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
30964 \begin_layout Standard
30975 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
30981 \begin_layout Subsection
30983 \begin_inset Index idx
30988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30990 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31007 name "subsec:Functions"
31014 \begin_layout Standard
31018 \begin_inset space ~
31023 contains under the button
31026 arg "math-insert \\functions"
31029 a number of function macros,
31031 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
31036 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
31045 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
31052 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
31054 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
31058 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
31064 \begin_layout Standard
31065 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
31067 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
31071 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
31077 \begin_layout Standard
31078 For some mathematical objects,
31080 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
31081 as described in section
31082 \begin_inset space ~
31086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31088 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
31096 \begin_layout Subsection
31098 \begin_inset Index idx
31103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31105 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31122 \begin_layout Standard
31123 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
31124 This may depend on your keyboard,
31125 or the bindings file you use.
31126 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31130 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
31133 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
31134 Our example is entered by typing
31139 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
31146 \begin_inset space ~
31150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31152 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
31157 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
31160 \begin_layout Standard
31161 \begin_inset Float table
31168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31169 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31174 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
31178 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
31186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31188 \begin_inset Tabular
31189 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
31190 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31192 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31193 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31277 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
31287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31331 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
31341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31385 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
31395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31439 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
31449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31493 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
31503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31547 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
31557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31601 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
31611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31655 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
31665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31709 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
31719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31754 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31776 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
31779 \begin_inset space ~
31787 arg "math-insert \\hat"
31791 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
31794 \begin_layout Section
31795 Brackets and Delimiters
31796 \begin_inset Index idx
31801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31803 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31818 \begin_inset Index idx
31823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31825 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31842 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31849 \begin_layout Standard
31850 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
31853 using just the keys
31858 But if you want to surround a large structure,
31859 like a matrix or a fraction,
31860 or if you have several layers of brackets,
31861 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
31864 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31869 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
31870 \begin_inset Formula
31872 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
31880 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
31882 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
31885 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31888 and the expression on the right was entered using the
31894 \begin_inset Formula
31896 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
31904 \begin_layout Standard
31905 If you use the delimiter icon,
31907 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
31910 \begin_layout Standard
31911 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
31912 If you use the option
31915 \begin_inset space ~
31921 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
31922 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
31924 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
31930 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
31931 with a dotted line,
31932 but nothing will be printed.
31935 \begin_layout Standard
31936 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
31937 like a square root,
31938 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
31939 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
31944 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
31947 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
31949 to insert a pair of parentheses,
31950 select the structure and enter
31953 arg "math-delim ( )"
31959 \begin_layout Section
31960 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
31961 \begin_inset Index idx
31966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31983 \begin_inset Index idx
31988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31990 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32005 \begin_inset Index idx
32010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32012 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32016 Multi-line Equations
32029 \begin_layout Standard
32030 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
32034 \begin_inset space ~
32042 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
32046 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
32047 Here is an example:
32048 \begin_inset Formula
32050 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
32059 The parentheses aren't automatic,
32060 but you can add them as described in section
32061 \begin_inset space ~
32065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32067 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
32073 When you construct the matrix,
32074 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
32076 or center-justified.
32077 This alignment is set in the box
32082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32133 for every column as default.
32136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32147 means that the first column will be left-justified,
32148 the second will be centered,
32149 and the third column will be right-justified,
32150 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
32151 The result will look like this:
32152 \begin_inset Formula
32155 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
32156 column & has & has\,right\\
32157 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
32166 \begin_layout Standard
32167 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
32170 arg "newline-insert newline"
32173 while the cursor is in the matrix.
32174 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
32176 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32179 or the math toolbar.
32182 \begin_layout Standard
32183 There are other arrays used in formulas,
32184 such as distinctions of cases.
32185 It can be created with the menu
32187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32188 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32190 \begin_inset space ~
32202 Here is an example:
32204 \begin_inset Formula
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32219 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32222 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
32225 arg "newline-insert newline"
32229 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
32230 one for each column.
32234 arg "newline-insert newline"
32237 in a non-empty formula,
32238 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
32239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32246 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
32247 the relation sign is in the second column,
32248 and the rest in the third column.
32249 A new row is created by every further entry of
32252 arg "newline-insert newline"
32256 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
32257 Here is an example:
32258 \begin_inset Formula
32260 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
32261 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
32266 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
32267 \begin_inset Formula
32269 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
32277 \begin_layout Standard
32278 The multi-line formula type described here is called
32285 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
32286 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
32287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32289 reference "eq:asquared"
32295 The other types are described in section
32296 \begin_inset space ~
32300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32302 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
32310 \begin_layout Section
32311 Formula Numbering and Referencing
32312 \begin_inset Index idx
32317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32319 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32334 \begin_inset Index idx
32339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32345 Referencing formulas
32356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32358 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
32365 \begin_layout Standard
32366 To number a formula,
32367 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
32369 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32370 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32372 \begin_inset space ~
32376 \begin_inset space ~
32384 arg "math-number-toggle"
32388 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32389 within parentheses.
32390 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
32391 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
32392 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
32393 separated by a dot:
32394 \begin_inset Formula
32404 arg "math-number-toggle"
32407 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
32408 You can only number displayed formulas.
32411 \begin_layout Standard
32412 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
32415 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32416 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32418 \begin_inset space ~
32422 \begin_inset space ~
32430 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
32433 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
32434 \begin_inset Formula
32437 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
32443 To number all lines use the shortcut
32446 arg "math-number-toggle"
32452 \begin_layout Standard
32453 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32456 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
32457 A label is inserted with the menu
32459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32468 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
32469 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
32470 It is recommended that you use the suggested
32471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32482 as the first part of the label,
32483 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
32484 We inserted in the following example the label
32485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32492 in the second line:
32493 \begin_inset Formula
32495 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
32496 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
32501 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
32502 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
32503 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
32505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32507 \begin_inset space ~
32515 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32519 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
32520 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32521 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
32524 \begin_layout Standard
32525 This is a cross-reference to equation (
32526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32528 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32536 \begin_layout Standard
32537 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
32538 's cross-reference box are described in section
32539 \begin_inset space ~
32543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32545 reference "sec:Cross-References"
32552 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
32559 \begin_layout Section
32560 User defined math macros
32561 \begin_inset Index idx
32566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32568 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32585 \begin_layout Standard
32587 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
32588 Math macros are explained in section
32591 \begin_inset space ~
32603 \begin_layout Section
32607 \begin_layout Subsection
32609 \begin_inset Index idx
32614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32616 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32633 \begin_layout Standard
32634 The standard font for text is italic,
32635 for numbers the standard is roman.
32636 To set a font in a formula,
32640 \begin_inset space ~
32648 arg "math-insert \\font"
32652 or enter its command,
32654 \begin_inset space ~
32658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32660 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32669 \begin_layout Standard
32670 \begin_inset Float table
32677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32678 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32683 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32687 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
32695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32697 \begin_inset Tabular
32698 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
32699 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32700 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32701 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32733 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
32741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32760 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
32768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32787 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
32795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32820 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
32828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32847 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
32855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32869 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
32870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32875 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32876 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
32884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32889 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32905 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
32913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32939 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
32947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32961 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
32962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32967 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32975 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
32983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32988 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
33000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33004 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
33012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33038 \begin_layout Standard
33039 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33048 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
33051 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
33054 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
33058 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
33078 \begin_layout Standard
33079 When you use a typeface,
33080 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
33081 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
33086 within the box will set the cursor outside,
33087 so that you have to use a
33088 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
33090 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
33093 space when you need a space in the box.
33094 Here is an example where
33095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33106 denotes the set of numbers:
33107 \begin_inset Formula
33109 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33118 The typefaces are nestable,
33119 which can cause confusion.
33132 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
33136 \begin_inset Newline newline
33139 So it is better not to use this feature.
33142 \begin_layout Standard
33143 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
33145 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
33149 \begin_inset Newline newline
33152 You can only print them emboldened using the command
33159 which works like the other typeface commands:
33161 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
33167 \begin_layout Standard
33174 works for all symbols,
33179 \begin_layout Standard
33180 A number of other font options are available as well,
33183 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33184 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
33186 \begin_inset space ~
33194 \begin_layout Subsection
33196 \begin_inset Index idx
33201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33203 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33220 \begin_layout Standard
33221 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
33223 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
33224 which is obtained using the entry
33227 \begin_inset space ~
33231 \begin_inset space ~
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33247 arg "math-insert \\font"
33251 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
33252 in black instead of blue.
33253 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
33254 Here is an example:
33255 \begin_inset Formula
33258 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
33259 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
33268 \begin_layout Subsection
33270 \begin_inset Index idx
33275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33277 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 \begin_layout Standard
33295 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
33296 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
33317 For most characters,
33326 are actually the same size,
33328 superscripts and subscripts,
33329 and certain other structures,
33335 Except for some operators,
33336 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
33337 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
33338 thinks are appropriate.
33339 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
33342 arg "math-insert \\style"
33346 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
33349 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
33353 which is normally in
33364 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
33368 The four styles are used in the following example:
33371 \begin_layout Standard
33372 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
33377 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
33382 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
33387 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
33393 \begin_layout Standard
33394 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
33396 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33398 \begin_inset space ~
33404 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
33406 if the base font size of the document is changed,
33407 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
33408 As an example here is a formula in the font size
33409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33419 \begin_layout Standard
33423 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
33429 \begin_layout Section
33430 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33432 \begin_inset Index idx
33437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33444 \begin_inset Index idx
33449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33451 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33468 \begin_layout Standard
33470 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
33473 \begin_layout Subsection
33474 Enabling AMS-Support
33477 \begin_layout Standard
33478 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by
33479 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
33495 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
33496 selecting the checkbox
33499 \begin_inset space ~
33503 \begin_inset space ~
33507 \begin_inset space ~
33516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33520 \begin_inset Index idx
33525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33527 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33544 \begin_inset space ~
33550 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
33551 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
33552 -errors in formulas,
33553 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
33556 \begin_layout Subsection
33558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33560 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
33565 \begin_inset Index idx
33570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33572 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33576 Multi-line Equations
33589 \begin_layout Standard
33590 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33591 provides a selection of different formula types.
33593 allows you to choose between
33618 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
33620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33628 for an explanation of these formula types.
33631 \begin_layout Chapter
33635 \begin_layout Section
33637 \begin_inset Index idx
33642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33651 name "sec:Cross-References"
33658 \begin_layout Standard
33659 One of \SpecialChar LyX
33660 's strengths is cross-references.
33661 You can reference every section,
33665 and list in the document.
33666 To reference a document part,
33667 you have to insert a label into it.
33668 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
33669 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
33672 \begin_layout Enumerate
33676 \begin_layout Enumerate
33677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33679 name "enu:Second-item"
33686 \begin_layout Enumerate
33690 \begin_layout Standard
33691 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
33693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33696 or by pressing the toolbar button
33703 A gray label box like this:
33705 \begin_inset Graphics
33706 filename clipart/label.png
33710 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
33712 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
33713 in our case the text
33714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33747 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
33749 if you insert a label into a section heading,
33750 the suggested prefix will be
33751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33765 \begin_layout Standard
33766 To reference the item,
33767 we refer to its label using the menu
33769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33772 or the toolbar button
33775 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
33779 A gray cross-reference box like this:
33781 \begin_inset Graphics
33782 filename clipart/reference.png
33786 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
33787 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
33788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33800 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
33803 \begin_layout Standard
33804 As an alternative to
33806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33810 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
33815 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
33817 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33829 \begin_layout Standard
33830 Here is our cross-reference:
33832 \begin_inset space ~
33836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33838 reference "enu:Second-item"
33846 \begin_layout Standard
33847 It is recommended to use a
33848 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
33850 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
33857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33858 described in section
33859 \begin_inset space ~
33863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33865 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
33875 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
33878 \begin_layout Standard
33879 There are eight formats of cross-references:
33882 \begin_layout Description
33885 this is the default:
33887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33889 reference "fig:Two-images"
33897 \begin_layout Description
33899 prints the number within two parentheses,
33900 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
33901 especially when the reference name
33902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33913 reference "eq:tanhExp"
33921 \begin_layout Description
33923 prints the page number:
33925 \begin_inset space ~
33929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33930 LatexCommand pageref
33931 reference "fig:Two-images"
33939 \begin_layout Description
33941 \begin_inset space ~
33945 \begin_inset space ~
33949 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
33951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33952 LatexCommand vpageref
33953 reference "fig:Two-images"
33959 \begin_inset Newline newline
33962 If the label is on the same page,
33963 it prints “on this page”;
33964 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
33965 it prints “on the facing page”;
33966 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
33967 it prints “on the previous page”;
33968 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
33969 it prints “on the next page”.
33970 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
33973 \begin_layout Description
33975 \begin_inset space ~
33979 \begin_inset space ~
33983 \begin_inset space ~
33988 the text “on page” and the page number:
33990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33992 reference "fig:Two-images"
33998 \begin_inset Newline newline
34001 If the label is on the same page,
34002 this format behaves like
34009 otherwise it behaves like
34013 \begin_inset space ~
34017 \begin_inset space ~
34026 \begin_layout Description
34028 \begin_inset space ~
34032 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
34033 \begin_inset Newline newline
34037 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34056 \begin_inset Index idx
34061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34064 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34079 \begin_inset Index idx
34084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34087 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34107 \begin_inset Newline newline
34110 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
34111 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
34113 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
34117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34118 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34126 is the default and preferred because
34130 supports only English documents.
34131 The format is specified by using the command
34135 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
34144 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34145 preamble of the document.
34146 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
34147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34163 \begin_inset Newline newline
34170 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
34175 \begin_inset Newline newline
34186 predefines reference formats for all available types.
34187 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
34188 So if you want to make formatted references to,
34191 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
34197 you might do so as follows:
34198 \begin_inset Newline newline
34205 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
34206 format{prop}{Proposition
34211 \begin_inset Newline newline
34214 For more information about defining formatted references,
34215 have a look at the package documentation
34216 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34218 key "prettyref,refstyle"
34224 \begin_inset Newline newline
34235 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
34240 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
34242 \begin_inset Newline newline
34245 If you activate the option
34246 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042040
34248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34252 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
34255 Format cross-references in work area
34256 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042041
34260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34264 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
34267 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
34270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34278 rather than just displaying the label.
34283 \begin_layout Description
34285 \begin_inset space ~
34289 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
34291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34292 LatexCommand nameref
34293 reference "fig:Two-images"
34301 \begin_layout Description
34303 \begin_inset space ~
34307 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34308 label for the reference:
34310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34311 LatexCommand labelonly
34312 reference "fig:Two-images"
34318 \begin_inset Newline newline
34321 This allows for customization,
34322 using \SpecialChar TeX
34324 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
34331 then you may want to use the
34334 \begin_inset space ~
34340 which will output only the part of the reference following the
34341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34349 This is the form needed for e.
34350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34354 \begin_inset space \space{}
34361 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34363 The varieties are adjusted in the field
34367 of the cross-reference window,
34368 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
34371 \begin_layout Standard
34372 You can only use the style
34376 to reference numbered document parts,
34377 while the reference style
34381 is always possible.
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34385 If you want to reference a section,
34386 put the label in the section heading;
34387 for floats put the label in the caption;
34388 for footnotes put the label in it.
34389 Referencing formulas is explained in section
34390 \begin_inset space ~
34394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34396 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
34404 \begin_layout Standard
34405 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
34409 \begin_inset space ~
34413 \begin_inset space ~
34418 sets the cursor before the referenced label
34419 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632729
34422 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632729
34424 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
34425 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label
34426 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632734
34428 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
34430 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632735
34434 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
34437 \begin_inset space ~
34442 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
34443 You can also go back with the toolbar button
34446 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
34450 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
34455 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34456 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
34464 \begin_layout Standard
34465 You can change labels at any time.
34466 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to
34467 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
34469 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
34470 change them all manually
34475 \begin_layout Standard
34476 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
34477 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
34478 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
34481 \begin_layout Standard
34482 References are described in detail in the section
34493 \begin_layout Section
34494 Table of Contents and other Listings
34495 \begin_inset Index idx
34500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34507 \begin_inset Index idx
34512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34514 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34529 \begin_inset Index idx
34534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34550 \begin_layout Subsection
34552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34554 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34561 \begin_layout Standard
34562 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
34564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34565 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34567 \begin_inset space ~
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34577 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
34579 If you click on it,
34585 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
34586 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
34587 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
34589 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34591 \begin_inset space ~
34596 that is described in section
34597 \begin_inset space ~
34601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34603 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
34611 \begin_layout Standard
34612 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
34613 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
34614 as described in section
34615 \begin_inset space ~
34619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34621 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
34627 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
34629 \begin_inset space ~
34633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34635 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34640 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
34641 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
34644 \begin_layout Subsection
34647 Listings and Algorithms
34648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34650 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
34657 \begin_layout Standard
34660 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
34661 You can insert them via the
34663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34664 List/Contents/References
34667 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
34670 \begin_layout Section
34671 URLs and Hyperlinks
34672 \begin_inset Index idx
34677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34684 \begin_inset Index idx
34689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34698 \begin_layout Subsection
34700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34709 \begin_layout Standard
34710 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
34712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34718 \begin_layout Standard
34719 Here is an example URL:
34723 \begin_inset Flex URL
34726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34728 https://www.lyx.org
34736 \begin_layout Standard
34738 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535921
34739 You cannot change the style of the link text
34740 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535924
34744 the URL text will always be in the style
34750 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535967
34751 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
34753 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34754 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34760 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34762 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536088
34768 \begin_layout Standard
34770 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536347
34794 (use whatever the current text font is).
34795 To have italicized URLs,
34799 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34801 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536274
34813 \begin_layout Standard
34815 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536203
34816 To be able to format the URL text,
34817 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
34819 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535961
34823 \begin_layout Standard
34825 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34827 \change_deleted -712698321 1676534694
34829 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34831 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535379
34832 between lines at certain characters,
34836 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34838 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535384
34849 \begin_layout Standard
34851 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535411
34852 It does not break at a hyphen (
34857 but you can change that by adding
34862 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535339
34864 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535862
34867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34868 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34869 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
34870 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
34874 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535861
34877 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34879 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535863
34881 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535864
34883 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34885 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535842
34886 this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
34887 a last resort is to put
34890 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34894 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535846
34898 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536760
34901 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34902 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34907 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535894
34908 in the preamble then the
34909 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535897
34911 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34913 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535899
34915 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34917 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535445
34919 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535903
34921 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34922 be broken at every character.
34924 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536383
34930 \begin_layout Standard
34931 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34940 URLs must not end with a backslash,
34941 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
34950 \begin_layout Subsection
34952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34954 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
34961 \begin_layout Standard
34962 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
34964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34967 or with the toolbar button
34974 The appearing dialog has two fields:
34984 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
34985 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
34987 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34989 name "LyX's homepage"
34990 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34996 an Email address like this:
34998 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35000 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
35001 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
35009 \change_deleted -712698321 1672058176
35013 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058271
35014 or any other valid URI (such as
35025 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35033 \begin_layout Standard
35034 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
35035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35047 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058343
35049 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons
35054 \begin_layout Standard
35055 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
35056 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
35057 To set the format of the link text,
35058 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
35059 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
35064 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35066 name "LyX's homepage"
35067 target "https://www.lyx.org"
35075 \begin_layout Standard
35076 The link text color can be changed,
35081 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
35083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35084 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35088 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
35089 \begin_inset Newline newline
35097 \begin_inset Newline newline
35104 in the PDF Properties dialog.
35105 \change_inserted 5863208 1686630948
35109 \begin_layout Standard
35111 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
35112 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
35113 you can use context menu (or
35114 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813434
35116 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
35120 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813424
35124 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
35126 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
35130 \begin_layout Section
35132 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
35134 \begin_inset Index idx
35139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35148 name "sec:Counters"
35155 \begin_layout Standard
35157 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35158 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35159 is its ability to manage counters.
35161 this is handled automatically,
35162 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
35163 This can be done in
35164 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
35166 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
35169 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35170 using the counter inset,
35171 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
35172 This allows one to set a counter's value;
35173 to reset it (to zero);
35177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35179 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
35180 Note that the section counter,
35182 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
35184 if you want the next section to be section five,
35186 then you need to set the section counter to four.
35193 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
35194 since the value added can be negative);
35196 to restore the saved value;
35197 and to print the value.
35198 These effects can also be limited to
35199 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
35201 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
35204 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35206 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
35208 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
35210 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
35213 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35217 \begin_layout Standard
35219 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
35220 There are five commands you can use:
35223 \begin_layout Enumerate
35225 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
35231 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
35234 \begin_layout Enumerate
35236 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
35242 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
35243 if you choose a negative number)
35246 \begin_layout Enumerate
35248 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
35254 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
35257 \begin_layout Enumerate
35259 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
35262 Save value of counter:
35265 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
35268 \begin_layout Enumerate
35270 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
35273 Restore value of counter:
35276 Restores the previously saved value.
35279 \begin_layout Standard
35281 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
35282 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
35287 \begin_layout Section
35289 \begin_inset Index idx
35294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35303 name "sec:Appendices"
35310 \begin_layout Standard
35311 Appendices are created with the menu
35313 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35315 \begin_inset space ~
35319 \begin_inset space ~
35325 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
35326 This part is marked with a red borderline.
35329 \begin_layout Standard
35330 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
35331 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
35332 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
35333 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
35337 \begin_layout Standard
35339 \begin_inset space ~
35343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35345 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
35355 \begin_inset space ~
35359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35361 reference "subsec:Export"
35369 \begin_layout Section
35371 \begin_inset Index idx
35376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35385 name "sec:Bibliography"
35392 \begin_layout Standard
35393 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
35395 You can include a bibliography database,
35396 which is explained in sec.
35397 \begin_inset space ~
35401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35403 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35412 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
35413 using the paragraph environment
35418 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
35419 \begin_inset space ~
35423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35425 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
35431 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
35432 such as author-year citations,
35433 and if you have more than a handful of references,
35434 then you should seriously consider
35438 using a bibliography database.
35441 \begin_layout Standard
35442 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
35443 we use two bibliographies in this document,
35448 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
35450 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
35452 the database approach relieves you,
35453 amongst other things,
35454 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
35457 \begin_layout Subsection
35458 The Bibliography Environment
35459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35461 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35468 \begin_layout Standard
35474 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
35475 If you click on it,
35476 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
35485 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
35486 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
35487 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
35491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35496 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
35502 \begin_inset Newline newline
35506 \begin_inset Flex URL
35509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35511 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
35522 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35532 a short form of its title,
35534 \begin_inset Newline newline
35542 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
35547 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35555 \begin_layout Standard
35556 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
35558 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35561 or the toolbar button
35564 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
35568 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
35569 Select one or more keys from the list and
35579 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
35580 If you click on the box,
35581 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
35584 \begin_layout Standard
35585 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
35586 Here are two examples;
35587 the first without a label,
35588 the second with the label
35589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35599 \begin_layout Standard
35603 Companion Second Edition
35607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35609 key "latexcompanion"
35617 \begin_layout Standard
35618 The \SpecialChar LyX
35619 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
35621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35631 \begin_layout Standard
35632 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
35633 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35639 \begin_inset Index idx
35644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35647 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35664 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
35665 the label needs to be given the form
35666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35677 Author A and Author B(Year)
35678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35685 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
35692 \begin_inset space ~
35697 in the document settings
35698 \begin_inset Index idx
35703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35705 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35721 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
35723 \begin_inset space ~
35729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35731 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
35740 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35742 Once you have done that,
35746 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
35748 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35751 dialog has three input fields instead of the
35770 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
35771 the second the year (without parentheses).
35772 These two are madatory.
35773 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
35779 ) and in abrreviated form (
35787 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
35788 add the abbreviated form to
35792 and the full list to the optional
35800 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
35801 If specified like this,
35804 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
35805 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
35808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35825 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list
35829 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
35830 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
35831 In the bibliography entry,
35832 author and year must be added manually.
35837 \begin_layout Standard
35838 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
35840 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35842 \begin_inset space ~
35850 arg "layout-paragraph"
35854 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
35857 \begin_layout Subsection
35858 Bibliography databases
35859 \begin_inset Index idx
35864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35866 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35883 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35890 \begin_layout Standard
35891 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
35895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35896 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
35897 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
35902 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
35903 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
35904 This database can be used for different documents,
35905 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
35906 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
35909 \begin_layout Standard
35910 The database is a text file with the file extension
35911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35923 containing the bibliography in a special format.
35924 The format is explained in
35925 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35932 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35934 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35936 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
35942 The file can be created using any text editor,
35943 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
35944 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
35946 \begin_inset Flex URL
35949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35951 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
35959 \begin_layout Standard
35961 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
35962 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35963 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
35964 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
35965 But it has its drawbacks,
35966 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
35967 Those are addressed by
35972 \begin_inset Index idx
35977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35980 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35995 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35996 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36007 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36009 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36010 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
36020 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
36023 \begin_layout Standard
36024 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36030 set in the document settings (menu
36032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36036 \begin_inset Index idx
36041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36043 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36064 \begin_inset space ~
36069 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36077 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36078 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36080 \begin_inset Index idx
36085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36087 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36091 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36105 \begin_layout Standard
36106 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36111 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36119 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36127 Add bibliography to TOC
36129 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
36134 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
36136 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
36141 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
36142 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
36147 \begin_layout Standard
36148 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36149 style file is a text file with the file extension
36150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36161 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
36162 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36163 distribution should provide several of these,
36164 and many publishers provide their own style files,
36165 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
36166 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
36167 but this is something for experts.
36171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36172 For information on how this is done,
36174 \begin_inset Newline newline
36178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36180 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
36190 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36196 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
36199 \begin_layout Standard
36200 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
36203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36205 \begin_inset Index idx
36210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36212 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36227 \begin_inset Index idx
36232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36252 \begin_layout Standard
36253 Accessing a database via
36257 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36260 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
36262 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
36267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36268 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
36270 \begin_inset space ~
36276 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36277 you cannot select a
36282 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
36286 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36289 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
36291 note the following.
36296 \begin_layout Standard
36301 has two different style files:
36302 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
36303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36314 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
36315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36326 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
36327 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
36328 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
36331 \begin_layout Standard
36336 styles are not set in the
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36345 but in the document settings.
36346 \begin_inset Index idx
36351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36353 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36368 in the dialog in the
36373 which is only visible if you use
36378 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
36379 These options are described in detail in the
36385 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36395 \begin_layout Standard
36396 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
36397 \begin_inset space ~
36401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36403 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36414 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36415 Bibliography Processors
36418 \begin_layout Standard
36419 To generate the bibliography from a database,
36421 uses a bibliography processor,
36422 that is an external program that reads the database,
36423 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
36424 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36426 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
36427 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
36431 \begin_layout Standard
36433 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
36434 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
36435 You can do this on a general level in
36437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36438 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36439 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36442 or for individual documents in
36444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36445 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36449 The following variants are available by default:
36452 \begin_layout Description
36455 \begin_inset Index idx
36460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36463 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36477 developed exclusively for
36481 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36487 provides full Unicode support,
36488 unlimited memory and many specific features
36498 it is strongly recommended to use
36505 \begin_layout Description
36506 bibtex the standard;
36507 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
36509 works with all bibliography packages,
36510 although it will probably fail with
36514 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
36517 \begin_layout Description
36518 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
36524 works with all bibliography packages,
36525 although more complex
36529 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
36534 features are supported.
36537 \begin_layout Standard
36538 By default (with the
36544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36545 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36558 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36559 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36560 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36565 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
36578 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36579 -based bibliography styles).
36580 This should suit most needs.
36583 \begin_layout Standard
36584 In Japanese documents,
36585 a specific processor is used.
36586 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
36587 (in \SpecialChar LyX
36593 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36594 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
36595 You can adjust it in
36597 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36598 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36599 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36605 \begin_layout Standard
36606 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
36607 Before adding options,
36608 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36615 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36625 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36629 \begin_layout Standard
36631 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
36632 These are explained in detail in section
36634 Customizing Bibliographies
36638 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36643 Additional Features
36646 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
36650 \begin_layout Subsection
36652 \begin_inset Index idx
36657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36659 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36676 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
36683 \begin_layout Standard
36684 Many different citation formats are common,
36686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36690 \begin_inset space \space{}
36693 numerical citation (as
36694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36701 like in this document),
36702 alpha-numerical citations (as
36703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36710 ) or author-year citations (as
36711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36720 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
36723 \begin_layout Standard
36724 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
36727 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36728 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36732 \begin_inset Index idx
36737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36739 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36753 you have a range of other options,
36754 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
36759 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
36763 \begin_inset space ~
36774 \begin_inset space ~
36779 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
36780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36782 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36790 \begin_layout Standard
36791 With a bibliography database (see
36792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36794 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36802 ) one has in contrary to the
36806 environment full access to the formatting styles.
36807 These style formats are available:
36810 \begin_layout Description
36812 \begin_inset space ~
36815 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36816 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
36819 \begin_layout Description
36820 Biblatex loads the package
36825 \begin_inset Index idx
36830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36847 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
36849 Biblatex citation style
36853 Biblatex bibliography style
36856 Options to the package
36860 can be entered in the
36867 \begin_layout Description
36869 \begin_inset space ~
36873 \begin_inset space ~
36876 mode) loads the package
36880 with the natbib compatibility mode.
36881 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
36892 behavior very closely.
36897 this option has some additional styles.
36902 styles are also supported by this variant.
36905 \begin_layout Description
36907 \begin_inset space ~
36910 (BibTeX) loads the package
36915 \begin_inset Index idx
36920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36923 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36937 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
36940 \begin_layout Description
36942 \begin_inset space ~
36945 (BibTeX) loads the package
36950 \begin_inset Index idx
36955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36958 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36972 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
36975 \begin_layout Standard
36984 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
36985 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
36995 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
36997 Whether the output uses numerical,
36998 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
37000 Biblatex citation style
37004 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
37005 a suitable style is proposed.
37012 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
37015 \begin_layout Standard
37016 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
37017 multiple style variants are available in the
37022 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
37023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37038 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
37039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37043 \begin_inset space \space{}
37047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37058 \begin_layout Standard
37059 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
37061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37065 \begin_inset space \space{}
37069 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
37070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37074 \begin_inset space \space{}
37078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37090 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37102 \begin_inset space ~
37108 Here is a simple example where the text
37109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37120 appears after the reference:
37123 \begin_layout Quote
37125 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37128 key "latexcompanion"
37136 \begin_layout Standard
37137 All styles except for
37141 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
37142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37150 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
37151 if the style requires this.
37154 \begin_layout Standard
37155 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
37156 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
37157 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
37158 the postnote will follow the last.
37163 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
37164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37167 qualified citation lists
37168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37174 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
37178 dialog will display three columns in the field
37186 \begin_inset space ~
37195 \begin_inset space ~
37203 \begin_inset space ~
37209 If you double-click on an item's
37212 \begin_inset space ~
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37226 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
37229 General text before
37235 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
37238 \begin_layout Subsection
37240 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
37241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37243 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
37247 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
37251 \begin_layout Standard
37253 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
37255 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
37258 \begin_inset space ~
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37273 Content\SpecialChar ldots
37276 context menu if specific conditions are met:
37279 \begin_layout Itemize
37281 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
37282 If citation entries include any of the fields
37283 \begin_inset Flex Code
37286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37288 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37297 \begin_inset Flex Code
37300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37302 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37310 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
37312 \begin_inset Flex Code
37315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37317 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37325 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
37330 \begin_inset Flex Code
37333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37335 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37344 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
37347 \begin_layout Itemize
37349 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
37350 If citation entries include any of the fields
37351 \begin_inset Flex Code
37354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37356 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37365 \change_inserted 5863208 1692129620
37367 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
37369 \begin_inset Flex Code
37372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37374 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37382 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
37383 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
37384 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
37387 \begin_layout Standard
37389 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37390 In addition to that,
37393 \change_inserted 5863208 1676821714
37398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37400 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37401 By default we provide python script
37402 \begin_inset Flex Code
37405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37407 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822064
37416 but you can use any modified script by setting
37417 \begin_inset Flex Code
37420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37422 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822135
37425 citation_search_view
37433 \change_deleted -712698321 1676971997
37435 \change_inserted -712698321 1676971998
37437 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37439 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972080
37444 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
37446 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37450 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37453 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972139
37454 The default setting is to be found in the file
37458 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
37466 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37467 your disk for matching files if you enable
37469 Search drive for cited files
37473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37474 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
37475 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37476 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37480 It uses the tokens supplied at
37484 in the same preferences section (by default:
37486 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968851
37491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37493 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37495 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972365
37497 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972365
37499 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37501 \begin_inset Flex Code
37504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37506 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968931
37507 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
37516 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972344
37518 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972349
37520 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37539 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972338
37542 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37543 are automatically stripped from the result.
37544 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972332
37546 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37555 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37557 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
37558 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
37560 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
37562 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37563 of the file (at arbitrary position).
37565 opens the first matching file it finds.
37566 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
37567 the more systematic your file naming is,
37568 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
37569 the greater the chance this works for you.
37574 \begin_layout Standard
37576 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402434
37577 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
37578 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37580 \begin_inset Flex Code
37583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37585 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
37594 \begin_inset Flex Code
37597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37599 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
37608 but there are also special keys,
37609 which are documented in the
37611 Customization manual
37617 Cite format description
37622 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37624 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402437
37625 Security implications
37628 \begin_layout Standard
37630 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402479
37631 Note that any document (or mainly
37632 \begin_inset Flex Code
37635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37637 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402454
37645 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
37648 \begin_layout Standard
37650 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402467
37651 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
37652 but beware what you are doing).
37657 \begin_layout Section
37659 \begin_inset Index idx
37664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37680 \begin_layout Standard
37681 An index entry is created if you use the menu
37683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37685 \begin_inset space ~
37690 or the toolbar button
37697 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
37699 \begin_inset space ~
37703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37705 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
37710 for some advanced methods)
37714 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37718 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
37720 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37724 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37729 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
37731 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37733 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
37736 the text that appears in the index
37737 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37738 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
37741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37748 index inset in the heading above for example)
37751 The word where the cursor is in
37752 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37756 or the currently highlighted text
37757 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37761 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
37763 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
37767 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37773 copied into the inset)
37778 \begin_layout Standard
37780 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
37781 (which prints out the index in your document)
37784 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
37785 in the document with
37786 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
37791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37792 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37794 \begin_inset space ~
37800 A light blue box labeled
37801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37812 will show the place where the index
37813 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
37815 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
37819 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
37824 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
37827 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
37829 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
37832 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
37834 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
37836 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
37838 as there are no settings to make.
37839 This changes if you select
37840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37843 Use multiple indexes
37844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37848 \begin_inset space ~
37852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37854 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37864 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
37865 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
37871 \begin_layout Standard
37873 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
37875 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
37877 you can customize index entries to look different.
37878 You can group index entries hierarchically,
37879 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
37880 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
37881 or additionally to,
37883 you can format the page reference (e.
37884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37888 make it bold for specific pages),
37889 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
37890 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
37892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37904 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
37909 \begin_layout Standard
37911 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
37912 give a short overview of
37913 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
37917 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
37918 these features in turn
37919 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
37922 in the next subsections.
37923 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37924 's index mechanism,
37925 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37927 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37929 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
37937 \begin_layout Subsection
37939 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
37940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37942 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37948 Grouping Index Entries
37949 \begin_inset Index idx
37954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37973 \begin_layout Standard
37974 Index entries are often
37975 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
37978 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
37979 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
37980 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
37986 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37993 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38003 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
38004 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
38007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38008 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38018 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
38019 Maximally two such subentry insets,
38021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38025 three levels of grouping in total,
38026 are allowed per index entry.
38027 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
38028 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
38029 In the \SpecialChar LyX
38031 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
38036 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38045 \begin_layout Standard
38047 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
38049 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
38050 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry)
38051 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38052 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
38053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38061 First we create the entry
38062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38076 reference "subsec:Lists"
38082 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
38083 \begin_inset space ~
38087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38089 reference "sec:Itemize"
38095 we insert the command
38098 \begin_layout Standard
38100 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38106 \begin_layout Standard
38108 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38112 \begin_layout Standard
38114 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38120 \begin_layout Standard
38122 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38123 for the enumerated list in section
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38130 reference "sec:Enumerate"
38140 \begin_layout Standard
38142 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
38143 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38145 subentries are indicated by a preceding
38146 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
38150 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
38154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38162 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
38164 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38166 although you have to take care that the character is not
38169 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
38172 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38174 \begin_inset space ~
38178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38180 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38186 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
38187 marks the grouping levels.
38191 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
38192 You can have three levels;
38193 every index level is indented a bit more.
38194 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
38195 If we don't have an index entry for
38196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38204 it will be printed anyway,
38205 but without a page number.
38210 \begin_layout Subsection
38212 \begin_inset Index idx
38217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38219 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38236 \begin_layout Standard
38238 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
38240 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
38244 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
38245 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
38246 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
38247 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
38251 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
38253 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
38257 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
38258 index more pages under the same entry
38259 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
38260 refer to a page range instead,
38261 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
38262 one that marks the beginning of the range,
38263 the other that marks its end
38267 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
38268 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
38269 To mark start and end,
38270 select the respective
38274 option in the index inset settings dialog.
38275 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
38276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38294 \begin_layout Standard
38296 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
38297 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
38298 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
38299 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
38302 \begin_layout Standard
38304 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38306 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
38307 we create an index entry in section
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38314 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
38322 \begin_layout Standard
38324 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38327 Paragraph environments|(
38330 \begin_layout Standard
38332 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38333 and another entry at the end of section
38334 \begin_inset space ~
38338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38340 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
38348 \begin_layout Standard
38350 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38353 Paragraph environments|)
38356 \begin_layout Standard
38358 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38383 respectively start and end the index range.
38384 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
38385 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
38386 An example is the index entry
38387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38400 \begin_layout Subsection
38402 \begin_inset Index idx
38407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38409 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38426 \begin_layout Standard
38427 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
38428 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
38435 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
38436 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
38438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38450 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
38451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38463 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
38464 \begin_inset space ~
38468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38470 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
38477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38492 \begin_layout Standard
38494 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
38495 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
38498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38499 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38505 \begin_layout Standard
38507 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
38508 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
38511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38512 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38524 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
38525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38545 \begin_layout Standard
38547 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38548 We referred for example in the index entry
38549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38557 \begin_inset space ~
38561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38563 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
38568 ) to the index entry
38569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38576 in the same section using the entry
38579 \begin_layout Standard
38581 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38584 GIF|see{Image formats}
38587 \begin_layout Standard
38589 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38590 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
38592 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
38593 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
38598 \begin_layout Subsection
38600 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
38601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38603 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
38610 \begin_inset Index idx
38615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38617 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38634 \begin_layout Standard
38636 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
38637 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
38638 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
38643 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
38646 f you use accented characters in the index entry
38647 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
38648 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
38649 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
38650 or if you use macros
38653 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
38657 \begin_layout Standard
38659 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
38660 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
38665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38666 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
38668 \begin_inset space ~
38672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38674 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38684 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
38685 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
38686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38712 \begin_inset Index idx
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38719 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38734 \begin_inset Index idx
38739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38756 \begin_inset Index idx
38761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38768 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
38770 maison but we want the order maïs,
38777 \begin_layout Standard
38779 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38782 previous entry@current entry
38785 \begin_layout Standard
38787 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38788 In our case we want to have
38789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38804 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
38807 \begin_layout Standard
38809 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38815 \begin_layout Standard
38817 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38818 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
38819 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
38821 See the next subsection for an example.
38822 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
38826 \begin_layout Standard
38828 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
38829 To accommodate for that,
38832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38833 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38837 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
38838 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
38840 you can pass the sort key
38841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38852 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
38855 \begin_layout Standard
38857 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
38858 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38860 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
38861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38869 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38871 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
38873 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38875 \begin_inset space ~
38879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38881 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38891 \begin_layout Subsection
38893 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
38895 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
38899 \begin_inset Index idx
38904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38906 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38923 \begin_layout Standard
38925 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
38927 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
38930 he appearance of index entries
38931 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
38932 can be formatted as usual
38934 via the text style dialog
38935 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
38937 the toolbar or shortcuts.
38938 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry
38941 \begin_inset Index idx
38946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38954 This is an italic dummy entry
38965 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
38966 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
38968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38981 will be listed separately.
38983 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38985 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
38989 \begin_layout Standard
38991 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38995 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38997 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
39001 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
39007 option in the index entry settings dialog.
39009 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
39010 number using the character
39011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39018 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39019 -command without a backslash.
39020 We can write for example
39021 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
39022 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
39042 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
39049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39053 a self-defined command
39054 \begin_inset Flex Code
39057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
39067 or an existing macro such as
39068 \begin_inset Flex Code
39071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39073 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
39086 \begin_layout Standard
39088 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
39091 italic page number:|textit
39094 \begin_layout Standard
39096 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
39097 to get the page number in italic.
39098 \begin_inset Index idx
39103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39105 italic page number:|textit
39110 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
39111 -commands begin with a backslash,
39112 but in this special case
39113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39129 \begin_inset space ~
39135 Have a look at section
39136 \begin_inset space ~
39140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39142 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
39147 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39153 \begin_layout Standard
39155 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
39156 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39165 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
39169 to generate the index,
39171 \begin_inset space ~
39175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39177 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
39188 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
39193 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
39195 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39198 key "latexcompanion"
39213 \begin_layout Standard
39215 we encourage you to
39216 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
39217 not format page numbers directly as shown above
39218 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
39219 use self-defined commands
39223 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
39224 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
39225 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
39227 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
39229 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
39230 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
39231 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
39234 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
39238 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
39239 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined
39240 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
39241 definition of the indexed term,
39242 so that users can easily find definitions.
39244 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
39248 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
39251 the following in the preamble
39254 \begin_layout Standard
39260 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
39262 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
39268 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
39276 \begin_layout Standard
39278 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
39280 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
39281 add the custom formatting
39282 \begin_inset Flex Code
39285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39287 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
39295 to the respective entry settings dialog.
39300 \begin_layout Standard
39302 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
39308 \begin_layout Standard
39310 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
39311 in the index entry.
39312 \begin_inset Index idx
39317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39324 The advantage is that,
39326 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
39327 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
39330 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
39331 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
39332 not every single index entry.
39333 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
39337 \begin_layout Standard
39339 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
39340 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39345 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
39351 If you use the index processor
39357 makeindex or xindex
39360 \begin_inset space ~
39364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39366 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
39372 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
39377 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
39378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39385 (style file) you use before they can be used.
39387 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
39390 \begin_layout Verbatim
39392 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
39394 (markup-locref :open "
39396 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
39399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39401 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
39403 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39406 key "latexcompanion"
39421 \begin_layout Standard
39422 You can also change the layout
39423 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
39425 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
39431 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
39433 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
39437 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
39441 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
39445 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
39448 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
39451 get a bold font for all index entries.
39453 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
39456 it is better (and required for
39457 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
39460 more advanced tasks
39461 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
39465 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
39468 to set up a so-called
39471 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
39495 ) to determine the formatting;
39496 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
39501 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
39503 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
39509 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
39516 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
39524 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
39532 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
39537 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
39539 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39541 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
39547 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
39549 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39551 key "makeindex,xindy"
39560 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
39561 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
39562 packages available that ease such formatting,
39564 \begin_inset Flex URL
39567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39569 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
39571 https://ctan.org/topic/index
39581 \begin_layout Subsection
39583 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
39584 Special Characters in Index Entries
39585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39587 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
39594 \begin_layout Standard
39596 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
39597 As already mentioned above,
39598 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
39601 \begin_inset Flex Code
39604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39606 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
39616 \begin_inset Flex Code
39619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39621 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
39631 \begin_inset Flex Code
39634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39636 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
39637 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39649 \begin_inset Flex Code
39652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39654 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
39663 If you use them literally,
39664 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
39666 you will not get the character itself.
39669 \begin_layout Standard
39671 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
39672 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
39674 \begin_inset Quotes els
39678 \begin_inset Quotes ers
39682 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
39684 the escape character is
39685 \begin_inset Flex Code
39688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39690 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
39691 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39701 (but this can be changed).
39703 \begin_inset Flex Code
39706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39708 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
39709 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39721 \begin_inset Flex Code
39724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39726 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
39727 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39739 \begin_inset Flex Code
39742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39744 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
39745 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39749 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
39761 \begin_inset Flex Code
39764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39766 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
39767 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39777 to get the special character you want.
39778 Note that the escape character,
39780 \begin_inset Flex Code
39783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39785 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
39786 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39801 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39808 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39818 \begin_layout Subsection
39820 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39823 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
39827 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
39830 \begin_layout Standard
39832 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
39833 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
39834 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
39835 This is not only time-consuming,
39836 but also error-prone;
39838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39842 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
39844 provides some functions to ease the task.
39847 \begin_layout Standard
39849 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39851 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
39852 you can open the outliner via
39854 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39858 \begin_inset space ~
39862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39864 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
39874 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
39875 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
39880 it will be more easier),
39885 -click on the entry and select
39887 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
39889 from the context menu.
39890 This will do just what it says:
39891 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
39894 \begin_layout Standard
39896 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
39899 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
39900 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
39901 you can select from the context menu
39903 Index All Occurrences of this Word
39906 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
39907 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
39908 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
39909 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
39913 is the word before the index entry,
39918 will be considered as well,
39924 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
39926 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
39927 but only relevant occurrences!
39928 So as convenient as this function might seem,
39929 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
39931 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
39934 \begin_layout Subsection
39936 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
39938 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
39942 \begin_inset Index idx
39947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39949 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39966 name "subsec:Index-Program"
39973 \begin_layout Standard
39975 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
39977 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
39984 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
39993 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
40001 for index generation;
40002 otherwise the program
40007 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
40010 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
40015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40017 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
40023 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
40024 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
40025 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
40026 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
40028 if you are writing in another than the English language,
40043 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
40044 As a further option,
40045 you can select the rather new
40052 \begin_layout Itemize
40054 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
40060 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
40061 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
40062 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40070 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
40076 how to manually fix this sorting,
40077 but this is very tedious work).
40080 \begin_layout Itemize
40082 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
40083 The alternative program,
40089 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
40090 It can sort most languages correctly,
40091 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
40097 is no longer actively maintained,
40098 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
40104 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
40105 But if you have it available,
40106 it is almost always a better option than
40113 \begin_layout Itemize
40115 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
40122 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
40123 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
40124 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
40125 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
40127 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
40128 The program is still in development,
40129 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
40130 But the program is definitely worth a try,
40135 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
40140 \begin_layout Standard
40142 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
40144 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
40148 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
40150 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
40153 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
40154 's preferences dialog,
40156 \begin_inset space ~
40160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40162 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
40168 The available options are listed and explained in
40169 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
40171 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40173 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
40179 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
40181 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40183 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
40193 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
40195 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
40199 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
40201 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
40204 alternative program
40205 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
40208 to generate the index.
40211 \begin_layout Standard
40212 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
40213 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
40216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40217 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40221 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
40224 \begin_layout Subsection
40226 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
40227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40229 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
40238 \begin_layout Standard
40239 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
40241 you might need to set up a separate
40242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40249 next to the standard index.
40251 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
40252 but there are packages that add this feature.
40259 \begin_inset Index idx
40264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40267 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40281 package to generate multiple indexes.
40282 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
40287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40288 If yours does not ship it,
40289 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
40292 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40300 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40302 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
40303 Please consult the package's manual for details.
40311 \begin_layout Standard
40312 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
40313 for the use of multiple indexes,
40316 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40317 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40320 and select the option
40322 Use multiple Indexes
40329 already contains the standard index
40330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40338 To add further indexes,
40339 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
40343 input field and press the
40348 The new index now also appears in the list.
40350 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
40351 label color to the new index.
40354 \begin_layout Standard
40355 Once the document changes have been applied,
40356 you can find the new index list in
40358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40359 List/Contents/References
40365 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
40366 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
40367 but there are additional features:
40370 \begin_layout Itemize
40371 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
40372 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
40375 \begin_layout Itemize
40376 By right-clicking on an index,
40377 you can change its type.
40379 you can specify an index to be a
40385 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
40387 if you use a book class,
40388 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
40389 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
40392 \begin_layout Itemize
40397 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
40398 code in the name of the index.
40401 \begin_layout Section
40402 Nomenclature/Glossary
40403 \begin_inset Index idx
40408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40415 \begin_inset Index idx
40420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40422 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
40425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40439 name "sec:Nomenclature"
40446 \begin_layout Standard
40447 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
40450 \begin_layout Standard
40451 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
40452 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40458 \begin_inset Index idx
40463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40466 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40481 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40484 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40491 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40495 \begin_layout Standard
40496 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
40498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40509 or the toolbar button
40512 arg "nomencl-insert"
40517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40528 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
40531 \begin_layout Standard
40532 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
40533 The first is the term or
40537 that you wish to define.
40542 of the term or symbol.
40545 \begin_layout Standard
40546 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40555 To use \SpecialChar TeX
40556 code for nomenclature entries the option
40560 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
40568 \begin_layout Subsection
40569 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
40570 \begin_inset Index idx
40575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40577 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40594 \begin_layout Standard
40595 If you have symbols in formulas,
40596 you have to define them in the
40600 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40607 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40616 \begin_inset Newline newline
40624 \begin_inset Newline newline
40630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40637 character starts/ends the formula.
40638 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
40639 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
40640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40650 For capital Greek letters,
40651 start the command also with a capital letter,
40661 \begin_layout Standard
40662 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40663 syntax is given in section
40664 \begin_inset space ~
40668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40670 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40678 \begin_layout Standard
40682 \begin_inset space ~
40687 dialog to format the description text;
40688 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
40690 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
40691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40695 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40702 in this document is:
40703 \begin_inset Newline newline
40708 dummy entry for the character
40713 \begin_inset Newline newline
40725 \begin_inset space ~
40735 font use the command
40766 \begin_layout Standard
40767 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
40768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40772 \begin_inset space \space{}
40776 \begin_inset Newline newline
40792 \begin_inset Newline newline
40795 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
40796 This command will make the font of all symbols
40803 \begin_inset space ~
40811 \begin_layout Standard
40812 If the characters |
40813 \begin_inset space \space{}
40817 \begin_inset space \space{}
40821 \begin_inset space \space{}
40826 \begin_inset space \space{}
40830 \begin_inset space \space{}
40833 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
40834 code they need to be escaped by adding a
40835 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
40837 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
40840 character in front of them.
40841 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
40843 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40844 LatexCommand nomenclature
40845 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
40846 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
40852 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
40854 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40855 LatexCommand nomenclature
40856 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
40857 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
40867 \begin_layout Subsection
40868 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
40869 \begin_inset Index idx
40874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40876 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40893 \begin_layout Standard
40894 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40895 -code of the symbol definition.
40896 This leads to undesired results when you,
40898 have symbols in formulas.
40899 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
40902 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40903 LatexCommand nomenclature
40905 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
40913 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40917 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40918 LatexCommand nomenclature
40921 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
40927 They will be sorted by
40928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40954 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40957 will be sorted before the
40961 since the character
40962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40969 is considered in sorting.
40972 \begin_layout Standard
40973 To control the sort order,
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40982 field of the nomenclature dialog.
40983 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
40984 For the example given,
40989 in this field for the
40990 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40998 will be located before
40999 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
41005 \begin_layout Standard
41006 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
41012 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41022 \begin_layout Subsection
41023 Nomenclature Options
41024 \begin_inset Index idx
41029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41031 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41048 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
41055 \begin_layout Standard
41060 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
41061 Here are some of its options;
41062 for more have a look at its documentation:
41065 \begin_layout Description
41066 refeq Appends the phrase
41067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41083 to every nomenclature entry,
41090 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
41093 \begin_layout Description
41094 refpage Appends the phrase
41095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41111 to every nomenclature entry,
41118 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
41121 \begin_layout Description
41122 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
41125 \begin_layout Standard
41126 To use one or more of the options,
41127 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
41129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41133 In this document the options
41141 \begin_layout Standard
41142 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41148 \begin_layout Standard
41149 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
41153 field in the nomenclature dialog:
41156 \begin_layout Description
41166 \begin_layout Description
41169 nomrefpage Like the
41176 \begin_layout Description
41179 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
41188 \begin_layout Description
41192 \begin_inset space ~
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41203 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
41206 \begin_layout Standard
41208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41215 are automatically translated for most document languages.
41217 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
41221 \begin_layout Standard
41230 \begin_inset Newline newline
41236 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41256 \begin_inset Newline newline
41263 pagedeclaration}[1]{
41264 \begin_inset Newline newline
41270 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_layout Standard
41293 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
41294 assure that you use
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41302 in the document settings under
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41313 \begin_layout Standard
41321 \begin_inset Newline newline
41325 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41342 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
41344 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
41345 \begin_inset Newline newline
41352 pagedeclaration}[1]{
41353 \begin_inset Newline newline
41357 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41374 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
41379 \begin_layout Subsection
41380 Printing the Nomenclature
41381 \begin_inset Index idx
41386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41388 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41405 \begin_layout Standard
41406 To print the nomenclature,
41409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41410 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
41415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41426 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
41427 By right-clicking on it,
41428 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
41429 You can choose between these settings:
41432 \begin_layout Description
41433 Default a space of 1
41434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41440 \begin_layout Description
41442 \begin_inset space ~
41446 \begin_inset space ~
41449 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
41452 \begin_layout Description
41453 Custom custom space
41456 \begin_layout Standard
41457 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
41458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41466 If you are not happy with the name,
41467 you can change it by redefining the command
41475 in order to change the name to
41480 add the following line to the preamble:
41483 \begin_layout Standard
41496 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
41499 \begin_layout Standard
41500 When you are using another document language than English,
41502 \begin_inset Newline newline
41518 where *** is the name of the language used.
41521 \begin_layout Subsection
41522 Nomenclature Program
41523 \begin_inset Index idx
41528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41530 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41547 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
41554 \begin_layout Standard
41561 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
41563 to generate the nomenclature.
41565 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41577 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
41583 The available options are listed and explained in
41584 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41586 key "nomencl,makeindex"
41594 \begin_layout Section
41596 \begin_inset Index idx
41601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41608 \begin_inset Index idx
41613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41615 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41632 name "sec:Branches"
41639 \begin_layout Standard
41640 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
41641 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
41642 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
41645 \begin_layout Standard
41646 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
41647 allows you to put text into branches.
41648 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
41649 To create a branch,
41650 either select the menu
41652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41653 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
41656 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
41658 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41666 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
41667 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
41668 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
41669 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
41671 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
41672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41684 \begin_inset space ~
41687 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
41688 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
41691 \begin_layout Standard
41692 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
41693 These boxes are inserted via the menu
41695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41698 where you can choose a branch.
41699 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
41702 \begin_layout Standard
41703 Here is an example,
41704 where only the question text appears,
41705 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
41708 \begin_layout Standard
41709 \begin_inset Branch Question
41713 \begin_layout Standard
41719 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
41727 \begin_layout Standard
41728 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41732 \begin_layout Standard
41738 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
41746 \begin_layout Standard
41753 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41754 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41758 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
41759 Consider for example a file
41760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41767 which has the above branches.
41769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41777 the PDF export file would be called
41778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41801 branch were inactive,
41803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41840 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
41841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41844 if both branches were active.
41845 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
41846 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41852 \begin_layout Standard
41854 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
41855 It is also possible to
41856 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
41860 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
41862 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
41866 whose content is output just in case the branch is
41871 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
41872 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
41876 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
41878 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
41881 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
41882 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
41883 right-click on the inset button and choose
41886 \begin_inset space ~
41894 \begin_layout Standard
41895 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41899 \begin_layout Standard
41906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41913 branch is deactivated.
41919 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41925 \begin_layout Standard
41926 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
41927 like inside equations,
41928 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41929 definitions for each branch.
41930 For example you can define for the question branch
41934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41935 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41938 \begin_inset space ~
41942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41944 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41957 \begin_layout Standard
41967 \begin_layout Standard
41977 \begin_layout Standard
41978 and for the answer branch
41981 \begin_layout Standard
41991 \begin_layout Standard
42001 \begin_layout Standard
42002 \begin_inset Branch Question
42006 \begin_layout Standard
42010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42038 \begin_layout Standard
42039 \begin_inset Branch Answer
42043 \begin_layout Standard
42047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42075 \begin_layout Standard
42076 Now it is possible to use the
42080 question{\SpecialChar ldots
42087 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
42090 commands to obtain conditional output.
42091 Here is an example formula where only the
42098 \begin_inset Formula
42100 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
42108 \begin_layout Standard
42110 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
42118 \begin_layout Standard
42119 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
42120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42124 \begin_inset space \space{}
42127 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
42129 For this advanced usage,
42137 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42140 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
42144 \begin_layout Standard
42146 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42148 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813809
42150 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813809
42152 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42154 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813823
42156 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813823
42158 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42160 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813812
42162 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42164 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813845
42165 to keep all branches of a given name in
42166 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42168 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813847
42170 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42172 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813855
42174 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813873
42175 activation branch status with
42176 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42178 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813886
42181 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813893
42182 of all branch insets in the document we provide
42183 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813893
42186 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42190 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813903
42195 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813949
42196 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
42197 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813904
42200 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42202 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813911
42204 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813959
42206 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42208 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813962
42210 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42211 keyboard shortcut or add
42212 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813966
42214 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813966
42216 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42218 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813971
42220 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42221 user-defined context menu
42222 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813975
42224 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813976
42226 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42228 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813978
42230 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42236 \begin_layout Section
42238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42240 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
42245 \begin_inset Index idx
42250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42259 \begin_layout Standard
42261 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
42266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42267 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42271 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
42274 allows you to set up
42275 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
42277 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
42281 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
42283 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
42287 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
42291 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
42296 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
42298 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
42302 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
42304 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
42307 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42309 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
42311 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
42319 \begin_inset Index idx
42324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42327 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42342 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
42343 which you need to enable by clicking
42345 Use Hyperref Support
42347 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
42348 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
42350 Customize Hyperref Options
42353 Among other things,
42355 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
42359 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
42361 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
42365 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
42369 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
42372 cross-references in the
42373 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
42377 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
42379 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
42383 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
42384 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
42388 table of contents entry or on a reference to
42389 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
42390 open a website or to
42392 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
42394 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
42396 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
42397 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
42402 \begin_layout Standard
42403 The header information in the dialog tab
42407 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
42408 Many programs are able to extract this information,
42411 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
42414 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
42415 This is very useful to sort,
42416 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
42420 \begin_inset space ~
42424 \begin_inset space ~
42431 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
42434 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
42437 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
42441 \begin_inset space ~
42445 \begin_inset space ~
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42454 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
42455 which is useful for presentations.
42458 \begin_layout Standard
42460 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
42462 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
42470 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
42471 you can customize the
42472 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
42474 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
42478 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
42480 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
42484 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
42486 and you can specify
42489 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
42491 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
42492 will look and if links for
42494 bibliographical backreferences are created
42495 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
42501 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
42502 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
42508 \begin_inset space ~
42512 \begin_inset space ~
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42521 option allows long links to be split;
42525 \begin_inset space ~
42529 \begin_inset space ~
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42541 \begin_inset space ~
42546 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
42550 \begin_inset space ~
42555 colors the different links.
42556 The default colors are:
42559 \begin_layout Labeling
42560 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42565 for hyperlinks and URLs
42568 \begin_layout Labeling
42569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42577 \begin_layout Labeling
42578 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42586 \begin_layout Standard
42587 but you can change these in the
42588 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
42590 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
42596 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
42598 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
42605 in this document they were changed with the
42606 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
42610 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
42620 \begin_layout Quote
42629 \begin_layout Standard
42631 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
42637 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
42639 depending on the option selected,
42640 the number of the section,
42641 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
42646 \begin_layout Standard
42651 you can specify if PDF
42652 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
42654 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
42658 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
42659 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
42661 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
42662 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
42664 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
42666 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
42670 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
42676 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
42678 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
42680 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
42683 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
42691 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
42692 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
42693 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
42694 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
42698 \begin_inset space ~
42701 2 will display all sections and subsections,
42703 \begin_inset space ~
42706 1 will only display the sections
42707 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
42708 (collapsing the rest)
42711 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
42715 \begin_layout Standard
42717 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
42722 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
42723 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42730 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
42731 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
42732 \begin_inset Flex Code
42735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42737 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
42748 not via the package options.
42749 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
42750 If you need to use one of those options,
42751 you can set them by adding
42754 \begin_layout Quote
42756 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
42759 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
42760 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
42762 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
42768 \begin_layout Standard
42770 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
42773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42774 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42777 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
42782 \begin_layout Standard
42784 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
42789 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
42791 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
42792 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
42793 input is simply ignored).
42794 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
42800 At the point of writing this,
42801 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
42803 documentmetadata-support.pdf
42806 but it is expected that in the future,
42807 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
42810 \begin_layout Standard
42812 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
42813 PDF properties are also used in this document.
42814 When you look in its document settings,
42815 you can see that some additional
42820 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
42821 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42833 \begin_layout Section
42835 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42839 name "sec:TeX-Code"
42846 \begin_layout Subsection
42849 \begin_inset Index idx
42854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42864 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42871 \begin_layout Standard
42872 As \SpecialChar LyX
42873 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
42875 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
42876 commands and constructs,
42879 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
42880 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
42881 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42882 -package for every problem,
42883 though \SpecialChar LyX
42884 cannot support all packages and their commands.
42887 \begin_layout Standard
42889 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
42890 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
42891 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
42894 Code box is created by the menu
42896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42898 \begin_inset space ~
42903 or by the toolbar button
42916 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
42923 \begin_layout Standard
42924 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
42926 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
42929 if you want to draw a frame around a word
42933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42934 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
42939 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42947 you can write the command part
42953 in a \SpecialChar TeX
42954 Code box before the word and the closing brace
42958 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
42959 Code box behind the word.
42960 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
42961 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
42964 \begin_layout Standard
42965 \begin_inset Graphics
42966 filename clipart/ERT.png
42974 \begin_layout Standard
42978 \begin_layout Standard
42979 This is a line with a
42983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43006 \begin_layout Standard
43007 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43016 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43017 -commands without parameters,
43018 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
43019 know that the command is finished.
43027 \begin_layout Subsection
43028 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43030 \begin_inset Argument 1
43033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43034 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
43041 \begin_inset Index idx
43046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43056 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43063 \begin_layout Standard
43064 When you write larger documents or books,
43065 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43066 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
43067 uses in the background.
43068 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
43069 is based on commands,
43071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43079 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
43081 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
43082 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
43083 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
43084 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
43087 \begin_layout Standard
43088 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
43090 As mentioned above,
43091 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43093 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43096 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43106 \begin_layout Standard
43107 As result you find that the package
43112 \begin_inset Index idx
43117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43120 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43136 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
43138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43141 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43145 \begin_inset space ~
43153 \begin_layout Standard
43158 usepackage[options]{package name}
43161 \begin_layout Standard
43162 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
43163 commands begin with a backslash,
43164 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
43165 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
43168 \begin_layout Standard
43169 In your case the package name is
43174 After a look in the documentation of the package,
43175 you know that the option
43179 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
43180 So you add the command
43183 \begin_layout Standard
43188 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43192 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
43196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43197 For more commands provided by the
43202 have a look at its documentation,
43204 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43219 \begin_layout Standard
43220 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
43221 For example if you use a
43226 you don't need the package
43231 you can instead write
43234 \begin_layout Standard
43239 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
43244 \begin_layout Standard
43245 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
43246 So if you plan to write a large document,
43247 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
43254 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
43257 \begin_layout Standard
43258 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
43259 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
43260 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43262 use the \SpecialChar TeX
43263 Code box as described in the previous section.
43266 \begin_layout Standard
43267 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
43269 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43271 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43273 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
43281 \begin_layout Standard
43282 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
43288 \begin_layout Standard
43292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43302 \begin_inset Note Note
43305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43306 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
43314 \begin_layout Left Header
43315 \begin_inset Argument 1
43318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43338 \begin_inset Note Note
43341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43342 defines the header line as described below
43350 \begin_layout Center Header
43351 \begin_inset Argument 1
43354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43363 \begin_layout Right Header
43364 \begin_inset Argument 1
43367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43388 \begin_layout Left Footer
43389 \begin_inset Argument 1
43392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43413 \begin_layout Center Footer
43414 \begin_inset Argument 1
43417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43429 \begin_inset Newline newline
43433 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
43439 \begin_layout Right Footer
43440 \begin_inset Argument 1
43443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43465 \begin_layout Section
43466 Customized Page Headers and Footers
43467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43469 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
43474 \begin_inset Index idx
43479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43481 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43496 \begin_inset Index idx
43501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43510 \begin_layout Standard
43511 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
43512 you need to set the
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43532 \begin_inset space ~
43538 As a second step add in the menu
43540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43541 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43550 Custom Header/Footerlines
43553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43557 This module offers the following 6
43558 \begin_inset space ~
43564 \begin_layout Description
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43570 \begin_inset space ~
43574 \begin_inset space ~
43578 \begin_inset space ~
43582 \begin_inset space ~
43588 \begin_layout Description
43590 \begin_inset space ~
43594 \begin_inset space ~
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43602 \begin_inset space ~
43606 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_layout Standard
43613 for the different positions in the header/footer.
43614 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
43617 \begin_layout Standard
43619 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
43620 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
43622 \begin_inset space ~
43626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43628 reference "fig:Page-layout"
43633 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
43636 \begin_layout Standard
43637 \begin_inset Float figure
43644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43647 \begin_inset Tabular
43648 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
43649 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
43650 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43651 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43652 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43654 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
43666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43672 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43683 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43701 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43712 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
43715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43716 The normal text on the page goes here.
43717 The running header is above the text,
43718 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
43719 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
43720 title of the chapter,
43721 company logo but you can use almost anything,
43727 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43736 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43747 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43765 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43776 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
43788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43812 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43817 name "fig:Page-layout"
43821 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
43834 \begin_layout Standard
43835 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43844 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
43847 \begin_inset space ~
43852 is set to “Default”.
43853 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
43861 \begin_layout Subsection
43865 \begin_layout Standard
43866 To define your header line,
43867 add all three header environments.
43868 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
43869 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
43870 For single-sided documents,
43871 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
43872 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
43873 nothing appears in the output.
43874 Defining the footer line works similarly.
43877 \begin_layout Standard
43878 For the definition,
43879 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
43880 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
43883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43885 \begin_inset space ~
43893 \begin_layout Description
43896 thepage prints the current page number
43899 \begin_layout Description
43902 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
43905 \begin_layout Description
43908 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
43911 \begin_layout Description
43914 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
43915 If the document has chapters,
43916 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
43918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43922 \begin_inset Quotes prd
43925 because it usually goes in a left header.
43928 \begin_layout Description
43931 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
43932 If the document has chapters,
43933 it prints the current section number and title instead.
43934 It is normally used in the right header.
43937 \begin_layout Subsection
43938 Default header/footer
43941 \begin_layout Standard
43942 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
43943 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
43944 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
43945 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
43946 but leave it blank.
43948 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
43952 \begin_inset space ~
43960 \begin_layout Subsection
43964 \begin_layout Standard
43965 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
43966 Some pages are different.
43967 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
43968 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
43969 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
43970 but that is normal.
43971 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
43974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43975 Header and footer decoration line
43978 \begin_layout Standard
43981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43984 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
43985 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
43997 in the following way:
44000 \begin_layout Standard
44007 headrulewidth}{thickness}
44010 \begin_layout Standard
44011 where thickness is a size in standard units like
44024 If you don't want a line,
44025 set the thickness to 0
44026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44032 \begin_layout Standard
44033 The lines can also be colored,
44034 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44036 If you really need this,
44037 have a look at the Internet or in section
44038 \begin_inset space ~
44042 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44053 Several header/footer lines
44056 \begin_layout Standard
44057 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
44058 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
44060 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
44061 To expand the height,
44062 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44077 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44078 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44080 \begin_inset space ~
44088 \begin_layout Standard
44095 headheight}{height}
44098 \begin_layout Standard
44103 is a size in standard units (e.
44104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44108 \begin_inset space \space{}
44116 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
44117 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
44118 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44119 logfile with the menu
44121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44123 \begin_inset space ~
44131 \begin_inset space ~
44136 to see if you can find a warning about the package
44141 \begin_inset Index idx
44146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44149 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44164 If there is such a warning,
44165 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
44168 \begin_layout Subsection
44172 \begin_layout Standard
44173 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
44174 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
44175 This example consists of the following definition:
44178 \begin_layout Description
44180 \begin_inset space ~
44190 empty optional argument
44193 \begin_layout Description
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44199 empty optional argument
44202 \begin_layout Description
44204 \begin_inset space ~
44214 in the optional argument
44217 \begin_layout Description
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44229 in the optional argument
44232 \begin_layout Description
44234 \begin_inset space ~
44248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44252 \begin_inset Newline newline
44256 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
44260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44263 in the optional argument
44266 \begin_layout Description
44268 \begin_inset space ~
44278 empty optional argument
44281 \begin_layout Description
44284 headrulewidth set to 2
44285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44291 \begin_layout Standard
44292 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
44294 For more specialized features,
44297 see the manual of the
44303 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44313 \begin_layout Standard
44314 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
44320 \begin_layout Standard
44324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44328 pagestyle{headings}
44334 \begin_inset Note Note
44337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44338 switches back to page style with the default headings
44346 \begin_layout Section
44347 Previewing Snippets of your Document
44348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44350 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44355 \begin_inset Index idx
44360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44367 \begin_inset Index idx
44372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44374 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44391 \begin_layout Standard
44393 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
44396 \begin_layout Subsection
44400 \begin_layout Standard
44401 To get previews working,
44402 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44408 \begin_inset Index idx
44413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44416 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44430 (on some systems named simply
44435 If it is not already installed,
44436 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
44439 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44446 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44448 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
44457 for \SpecialChar LyX
44458 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44459 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
44463 \begin_layout Subsection
44467 \begin_layout Standard
44468 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44469 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44471 activate the option
44474 \begin_inset space ~
44481 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44487 \begin_inset space ~
44491 \begin_inset space ~
44494 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
44501 \begin_inset space ~
44514 \begin_inset space ~
44519 is the multiplication factor for the size.
44522 \begin_layout Standard
44523 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44528 \begin_inset space ~
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44544 \begin_layout Standard
44545 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
44546 and when you finish editing an inset.
44549 \begin_layout Standard
44550 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44559 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
44562 \begin_inset space ~
44568 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
44576 \begin_layout Subsection
44577 Selected document parts
44580 \begin_layout Standard
44581 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
44582 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
44583 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44586 insert a preview inset via the menu
44588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44592 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
44593 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
44594 If you click on the preview,
44595 you can edit the previewed stuff.
44598 \begin_layout Standard
44600 To create rotated boxes,
44601 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44608 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44620 is explained in section
44622 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
44627 \begin_inset space ~
44637 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
44638 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44639 the final rotated boxes,
44640 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
44641 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
44642 Here is the result:
44645 \begin_layout Standard
44646 \begin_inset Preview
44648 \begin_layout Standard
44653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44657 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
44663 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
44673 height_special "totalheight"
44678 backgroundcolor "none"
44681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44706 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
44712 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
44719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44734 \begin_layout Standard
44735 Previewing works also for colors.
44736 In this example a special framed,
44737 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44755 is explained in section
44762 \begin_inset space ~
44775 \begin_layout Standard
44776 \begin_inset Preview
44778 \begin_layout Standard
44782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
44806 This is text within a colored,
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44826 \begin_layout Standard
44827 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44833 \begin_layout Standard
44834 If \SpecialChar LyX
44835 does not show a preview,
44836 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
44837 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44838 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
44840 If \SpecialChar LyX
44841 cannot create a preview,
44842 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44844 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
44845 Code and don't know if it is correct,
44846 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
44849 \begin_layout Subsection
44854 \begin_layout Standard
44855 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44856 source of the whole document or parts of it.
44859 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44861 \begin_inset space ~
44866 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44868 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
44869 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
44871 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
44872 To view the whole document as source,
44873 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
44879 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
44881 but note that if you have several documents open,
44882 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
44884 not just the one which is open at the time.
44887 \begin_layout Section
44888 Advanced Find and Replace
44889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44891 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
44896 \begin_inset Index idx
44901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44908 \begin_inset Index idx
44913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44922 \begin_layout Subsection
44926 \begin_layout Standard
44927 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
44928 allows for searching of complex,
44929 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
44931 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
44932 The key-features are:
44935 \begin_layout Itemize
44936 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
44937 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
44938 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
44939 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
44942 \begin_layout Itemize
44943 Search may be format-insensitive,
44944 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
44947 and even mathematics),
44948 or it may be format-sensitive,
44951 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
44954 \begin_layout Itemize
44955 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
44956 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
44959 \begin_layout Itemize
44960 Search may be widened to a specific
44966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44973 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
44974 all the open files,
44975 or all the manuals available from the
44982 \begin_layout Itemize
44983 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
44984 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
44985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44994 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
44997 \begin_layout Subsection
45001 \begin_layout Standard
45002 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
45004 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45017 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
45020 ) or the toolbar button
45023 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45029 Advanced Find and Replace
45034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45038 \begin_layout Standard
45044 mini-editor a simple word,
45045 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
45048 \begin_inset space ~
45053 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
45056 arg "paragraph-break"
45060 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
45062 bold or normal face,
45063 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
45067 arg "paragraph-break"
45070 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
45074 searches backwards.
45077 \begin_layout Standard
45081 \begin_inset space ~
45086 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
45094 \begin_inset space ~
45099 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
45102 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45103 Searching for mathematics
45106 \begin_layout Standard
45107 Mathematical formulas,
45109 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
45112 or something more complex like
45113 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
45117 may be searched for by typing them in the
45122 When searching for a formula,
45123 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
45124 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
45125 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
45131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45135 \begin_layout Standard
45136 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
45137 This is done by switching to the
45141 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
45154 \begin_layout Itemize
45155 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
45158 \begin_layout Itemize
45159 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
45160 and within the same text style only.
45163 \begin_layout Itemize
45164 a normal word in a section heading,
45165 and searching for it,
45166 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
45168 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
45169 in addition to a section style,
45170 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
45173 \begin_layout Itemize
45174 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
45177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45181 \begin_layout Standard
45182 The entries made in the
45186 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
45189 \begin_inset space ~
45195 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
45200 button or alternatively press
45203 arg "paragraph-break"
45210 while the cursor is in the
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45221 \begin_layout Standard
45222 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
45224 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
45227 \begin_layout Itemize
45228 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
45229 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
45230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45237 with its typewriter version
45238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45252 \begin_layout Itemize
45253 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
45254 for example replacing occurrences of
45255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45259 \begin_inset Formula $R$
45263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45271 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
45275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45278 (you may want to enable the
45281 \begin_inset space ~
45289 \begin_inset space ~
45294 options and disable the
45303 in order to avoid replacing all
45304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45311 letters occurring in normal text),
45313 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
45317 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
45322 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
45326 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
45332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45336 \begin_layout Standard
45337 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
45341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45342 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
45344 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45346 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
45356 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
45361 This is done with the context menu
45363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45364 Insert Regular Expression
45366 while the cursor is in the
45371 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
45375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45376 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
45379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45383 \begin_inset space ~
45386 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
45388 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
45394 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
45395 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
45396 Examples of using such a feature may be:
45399 \begin_layout Enumerate
45400 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
45406 editor the fraction
45407 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
45411 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45414 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
45417 \begin_layout Enumerate
45418 Searching for all text with a given style:
45421 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
45425 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814407
45429 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
45430 Adhere to search string formatting of
45431 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814409
45433 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
45439 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45441 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814412
45443 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45447 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814414
45451 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45453 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814534
45455 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814534
45459 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814548
45465 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814554
45466 in this section pressed
45472 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45477 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
45478 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
45481 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45484 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
45485 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
45487 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
45488 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
45492 \begin_layout Description
45494 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45495 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
45496 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814961
45498 as with the other options,
45499 the setting of the search string)
45500 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45504 \begin_layout Description
45506 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45511 color colored text like cyan,
45516 \begin_layout Description
45518 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
45520 \begin_inset space ~
45528 \begin_layout Description
45530 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
45532 \begin_inset space ~
45539 \begin_layout Description
45541 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
45543 \begin_inset space ~
45552 \begin_layout Description
45554 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
45556 \begin_inset space ~
45565 \begin_layout Description
45567 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
45568 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
45573 \begin_layout Description
45575 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
45582 \begin_layout Description
45584 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
45585 Strike-through Single,
45589 \begin_layout Description
45591 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
45592 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
45595 \begin_layout Description
45597 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
45599 \begin_inset space ~
45612 \begin_layout Standard
45614 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
45615 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
45616 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45620 and referring back to them through
45621 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45626 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
45632 try searching with the regexp
45633 \begin_inset Newline newline
45637 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
45649 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
45650 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
45655 \begin_inset Newline newline
45658 in order to find word repetitions,
45662 \begin_layout Standard
45663 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
45664 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
45670 \begin_layout Standard
45671 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45680 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
45681 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
45682 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
45684 \begin_inset space ~
45688 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45691 always refers to the first occurrence of
45692 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45695 in all entered regexps.
45703 \begin_layout Section
45705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45707 name "sec:Spellchecking"
45712 \begin_inset Index idx
45717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45726 \begin_layout Standard
45728 has a built-in spell checker.
45731 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45739 key or the toolbar button
45742 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45745 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
45746 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
45747 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
45748 Whenever an unknown word is found,
45749 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
45750 In the spellchecker sidebar,
45751 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
45752 if any could be found.
45753 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
45758 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
45759 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
45762 \begin_layout Standard
45764 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
45766 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45770 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
45772 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
45773 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
45776 \begin_inset space ~
45784 arg "dialog-show character"
45787 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
45789 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
45794 can be downloaded from here:
45795 \begin_inset Newline newline
45799 \begin_inset Flex URL
45802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45804 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
45806 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
45807 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
45808 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
45816 \begin_inset Newline newline
45820 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
45822 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
45823 You should download
45826 \begin_inset space ~
45829 files for each language
45830 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
45835 link at the end of the opened webpage)
45838 To install a dictionary on Windows,
45840 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
45844 \begin_inset space ~
45847 files into \SpecialChar LyX
45848 's installation subfolder
45856 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45858 \begin_inset Newline newline
45861 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
45862 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
45863 but in most cases these are
45883 is the language code.
45886 \begin_layout Subsection
45890 \begin_layout Standard
45893 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45894 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45896 \begin_inset space ~
45899 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45902 you can set the following things:
45905 \begin_layout Description
45907 \begin_inset space ~
45910 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
45911 should use for spell checking.
45912 Depending on your platform,
45923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45924 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
45925 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
45940 \begin_inset space ~
45943 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
45946 \begin_layout Description
45948 \begin_inset space ~
45951 language If this field is not empty,
45953 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
45954 no matter what the document language is.
45957 \begin_layout Description
45959 \begin_inset space ~
45962 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
45964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45968 \begin_inset space \space{}
45972 This should normally not be needed.
45975 \begin_layout Description
45977 \begin_inset space ~
45981 \begin_inset space ~
45984 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
45985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45995 \begin_layout Description
45997 \begin_inset space ~
46000 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
46001 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
46002 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
46003 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
46004 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
46007 \begin_layout Description
46009 \begin_inset space ~
46013 \begin_inset space ~
46017 \begin_inset space ~
46020 comments If enabled,
46021 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
46024 \begin_layout Section
46026 \begin_inset Index idx
46031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46040 name "sec:Thesaurus"
46047 \begin_layout Standard
46049 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
46050 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
46051 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46062 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
46073 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
46077 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
46078 which are available for many languages.
46081 \begin_layout Standard
46082 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
46086 \begin_layout Subsection
46087 Setting up the thesaurus
46090 \begin_layout Standard
46099 thesauri consist of two files per language:
46100 A file with the suffix
46104 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
46109 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
46110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46114 \begin_inset space ~
46123 the US English files are named:
46126 \begin_layout Itemize
46130 \begin_layout Itemize
46134 \begin_layout Standard
46143 and its thesaurus installed,
46144 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
46147 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46148 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46149 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
46151 \begin_inset space ~
46156 ) to the path where they are installed.
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46162 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
46163 typical locations are
46170 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
46175 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
46180 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
46184 dictionaries are to be found at
46190 LibreOffice-<Version>
46198 the default location is
46200 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
46201 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
46202 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
46203 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
46204 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
46205 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
46214 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
46215 installation process,
46216 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
46219 \begin_layout Standard
46220 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
46222 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
46224 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
46227 thesaurus dictionaries,
46228 you can download them from here:
46229 \begin_inset Newline newline
46233 \begin_inset Flex URL
46236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46238 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
46240 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
46241 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
46242 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
46252 \begin_layout Standard
46253 To install a new dictionary,
46254 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
46256 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46257 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46258 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
46260 \begin_inset space ~
46265 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
46267 If this path is not defined yet,
46268 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
46272 \begin_layout Standard
46274 you can also install new dictionaries via
46276 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
46281 via your package manager (look for
46287 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
46291 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
46292 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
46294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46300 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46301 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46302 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
46304 \begin_inset space ~
46309 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
46312 \begin_layout Subsection
46313 Using the thesaurus
46316 \begin_layout Standard
46317 To start the thesaurus,
46320 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46323 or the toolbar button
46326 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46329 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
46330 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
46331 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
46333 for some languages (such as English),
46334 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
46335 but also generic terms (such as
46344 related terms (such as
46347 \begin_inset space ~
46360 \begin_inset space ~
46370 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
46380 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
46383 \begin_layout Standard
46384 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
46385 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
46386 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
46389 \begin_layout Standard
46390 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
46396 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
46398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46402 \begin_inset space \space{}
46405 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
46406 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
46407 infinitive for verbs).
46409 looking up the word form
46414 while results are shown for the word form
46419 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
46420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46424 \begin_inset space \space{}
46436 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
46437 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
46438 thus the ending remains).
46441 \begin_layout Section
46443 \begin_inset Index idx
46448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46455 \begin_inset Index idx
46460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46462 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46479 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
46486 \begin_layout Standard
46487 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
46488 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
46489 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
46491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46496 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46498 \begin_inset space ~
46506 \begin_layout Standard
46507 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
46522 The color depends on the author that made the change.
46523 You can change the color in
46525 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46526 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46528 \begin_inset space ~
46532 \begin_inset space ~
46537 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46543 \begin_inset Index idx
46548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46550 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
46565 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
46566 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
46569 arg "changes-merge"
46575 \begin_layout Standard
46576 When change tracking is activated,
46577 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
46579 \begin_inset Index idx
46584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46586 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46603 \begin_layout Standard
46604 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46610 \begin_layout Standard
46611 \begin_inset Graphics
46612 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
46620 \begin_layout Standard
46621 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46627 \begin_layout Standard
46628 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
46631 \begin_layout Standard
46632 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46638 \begin_layout Standard
46639 \begin_inset Tabular
46640 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
46641 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46642 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46643 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46653 arg "changes-track"
46661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46667 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46669 \begin_inset space ~
46672 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46674 \begin_inset space ~
46683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46692 arg "changes-output"
46700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46706 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46708 \begin_inset space ~
46711 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46717 \begin_inset space ~
46721 \begin_inset space ~
46730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46751 Jumps to the next change
46757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46766 arg "change-accept"
46774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46782 \begin_inset space ~
46785 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46787 \begin_inset space ~
46796 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46805 arg "change-reject"
46813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46821 \begin_inset space ~
46824 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46826 \begin_inset space ~
46835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46844 arg "changes-merge"
46852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46858 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46860 \begin_inset space ~
46863 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46883 arg "all-changes-accept"
46891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46899 \begin_inset space ~
46902 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46904 \begin_inset space ~
46908 \begin_inset space ~
46917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46926 arg "all-changes-reject"
46934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46942 \begin_inset space ~
46945 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46947 \begin_inset space ~
46951 \begin_inset space ~
46960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46983 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46984 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46986 \begin_inset space ~
46995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47018 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47020 \begin_inset space ~
47036 \begin_layout Standard
47037 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47043 \begin_layout Standard
47044 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
47045 especially no format changes like from
47064 \begin_layout Standard
47065 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
47067 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
47068 When you merge changes,
47069 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
47070 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
47071 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
47072 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
47075 \begin_layout Standard
47076 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
47079 \begin_layout Standard
47081 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
47082 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47088 \begin_inset Index idx
47093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47096 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47111 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
47114 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47121 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47127 \begin_layout Section
47128 Comparison of Documents
47129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47131 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
47136 \begin_inset Index idx
47141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47142 Comparison of documents
47150 \begin_layout Standard
47151 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
47154 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47158 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
47159 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
47160 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
47161 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
47164 \begin_inset space ~
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47172 \begin_inset space ~
47181 \begin_inset space ~
47185 \begin_inset space ~
47189 \begin_inset space ~
47193 \begin_inset space ~
47197 \begin_inset space ~
47201 \begin_inset space ~
47206 enables the change tracking option
47209 \begin_inset space ~
47213 \begin_inset space ~
47217 \begin_inset space ~
47222 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
47225 \begin_layout Section
47226 International Support
47227 \begin_inset Index idx
47232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47233 International support
47241 \begin_layout Standard
47242 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
47243 with any language you want.
47244 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47249 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
47257 \begin_layout Standard
47260 also supports phonetic symbols,
47262 \begin_inset space ~
47266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47268 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
47276 \begin_layout Subsection
47278 \begin_inset Index idx
47283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47285 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47300 \begin_inset Index idx
47305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47307 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47322 \begin_inset Index idx
47327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47329 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47346 \begin_layout Standard
47349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47350 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47353 dialog lets you set
47356 the quote style and character encoding
47361 \begin_layout Standard
47366 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47371 \begin_inset space ~
47376 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
47377 For details about the different encoding options see section
47378 \begin_inset space ~
47382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47384 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47392 \begin_layout Subsection
47393 Keyboard mapping configuration
47394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47396 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
47403 \begin_layout Standard
47404 If you have for example a U.
47405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47408 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
47409 you can use an alternate keymap.
47411 if you want to write in Italian,
47412 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
47413 to use an Italian keymap.
47416 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47417 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47418 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
47421 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
47423 \begin_inset space ~
47427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47429 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47435 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
47438 \begin_layout Standard
47440 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
47444 normally write in Italian on a U.
47445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47448 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
47450 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
47451 This and many other customizations are explained in the
47458 \begin_layout Chapter
47461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47463 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
47470 \begin_layout Standard
47471 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
47472 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
47475 \begin_layout Section
47477 \begin_inset Index idx
47482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47484 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47501 \begin_layout Standard
47506 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
47509 \begin_layout Subsection
47513 \begin_layout Standard
47514 Creates a new document.
47517 \begin_layout Subsection
47521 \begin_layout Standard
47522 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
47523 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
47524 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
47526 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
47528 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
47533 \begin_layout Subsection
47537 \begin_layout Standard
47541 \begin_layout Subsection
47545 \begin_layout Standard
47546 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
47547 Click there on a file to open it.
47550 \begin_layout Subsection
47552 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
47556 \begin_layout Standard
47558 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
47559 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
47563 \begin_layout Subsection
47567 \begin_layout Standard
47568 Closes the current document.
47571 \begin_layout Subsection
47575 \begin_layout Standard
47576 Closes all opened documents.
47579 \begin_layout Subsection
47583 \begin_layout Standard
47584 Saves the actual document.
47587 \begin_layout Subsection
47591 \begin_layout Standard
47592 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
47593 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
47597 \begin_layout Subsection
47599 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
47603 \begin_layout Standard
47605 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
47606 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
47611 \begin_layout Subsection
47615 \begin_layout Standard
47616 Saves all opened documents.
47619 \begin_layout Subsection
47623 \begin_layout Standard
47624 Reloads the actual document from disk.
47627 \begin_layout Subsection
47631 \begin_layout Standard
47632 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
47633 It is described in the section
47635 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
47640 Additional Features
47645 \begin_layout Subsection
47649 \begin_layout Standard
47650 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
47656 plain text files and comma separated,
47657 table-like text files (CSV).
47658 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
47662 \begin_layout Standard
47663 When using the menu entry
47666 \begin_inset space ~
47672 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
47673 when using the menu entry
47676 \begin_inset space ~
47680 \begin_inset space ~
47684 \begin_inset space ~
47690 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
47691 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
47694 \begin_layout Subsection
47696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47698 name "subsec:Export"
47705 \begin_layout Standard
47706 You can export your document to various file formats.
47707 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47709 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
47710 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
47711 during its configuration.
47714 \begin_layout Standard
47715 Here is a list of all available entries;
47716 some of them are explained in detail in section
47717 \begin_inset space ~
47721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47723 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47731 \begin_layout Description
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47740 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47745 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
47746 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
47747 \begin_inset Newline newline
47750 Since \SpecialChar LyX
47751 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
47755 \begin_layout Description
47756 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
47761 \begin_layout Description
47763 \begin_inset space ~
47766 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
47771 \begin_layout Description
47772 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
47773 's native DVI-format.
47774 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
47776 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
47783 \begin_layout Description
47784 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
47787 \begin_layout Description
47789 \begin_inset space ~
47796 ) DVI-format using the program
47798 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47802 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
47807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47816 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
47824 \begin_layout Description
47826 \begin_inset space ~
47829 (cropped) the same as
47833 but with cropped page margins.
47836 \begin_layout Description
47838 \begin_inset space ~
47841 Dot text file with code in the programming language
47845 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
47850 \begin_layout Description
47855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47864 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
47872 \begin_layout Description
47874 \begin_inset space ~
47878 \begin_inset space ~
47881 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
47886 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
47893 \begin_layout Description
47897 \begin_inset space ~
47906 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47907 source that is compilable with the program
47909 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47913 \begin_layout Description
47917 \begin_inset space ~
47922 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47924 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
47934 \begin_layout Description
47938 \begin_inset space ~
47943 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47945 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
47946 only this format is readable by the
47953 \begin_layout Description
47957 \begin_inset space ~
47966 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47967 source that is compilable with the program
47973 \begin_layout Description
47975 \begin_inset space ~
47979 \begin_inset space ~
47986 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47987 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
47992 \begin_layout Description
47994 \begin_inset space ~
47997 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
47998 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
48000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48004 \begin_inset space \space{}
48009 \begin_inset space ~
48014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48029 represent the version number)
48032 \begin_layout Description
48034 \begin_inset space ~
48038 \begin_inset space ~
48041 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
48043 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48048 \begin_layout Description
48049 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
48050 's internal XHTML engine
48053 \begin_layout Description
48055 \begin_inset space ~
48059 \begin_inset space ~
48063 \begin_inset space ~
48067 \begin_inset space ~
48070 XML Office Open XML file,
48076 For the conversion the program
48085 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
48088 \begin_layout Description
48089 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
48094 \begin_layout Description
48096 \begin_inset space ~
48099 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
48109 For the conversion the program
48118 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
48121 \begin_layout Description
48123 \begin_inset space ~
48126 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
48127 For the conversion the program
48136 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
48139 \begin_layout Description
48141 \begin_inset space ~
48144 (cropped) the same as
48147 \begin_inset space ~
48152 but with cropped page margins
48155 \begin_layout Description
48159 \begin_inset space ~
48164 PDF-format using the program
48169 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
48172 \begin_layout Description
48176 \begin_inset space ~
48180 \begin_inset space ~
48188 \begin_inset space ~
48193 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
48194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48198 \begin_inset space \space{}
48201 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
48204 \begin_layout Description
48208 \begin_inset space ~
48213 PDF-format using the program
48215 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48219 produces PDF-files directly
48222 \begin_layout Description
48226 \begin_inset space ~
48231 PDF-format using the program
48236 produces PDF-files directly
48239 \begin_layout Description
48243 \begin_inset space ~
48248 PDF-format using the program
48253 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
48256 \begin_layout Description
48260 \begin_inset space ~
48265 PDF-format using the program
48271 produces PDF-files directly
48274 \begin_layout Description
48278 \begin_inset space ~
48286 \begin_layout Description
48290 \begin_inset space ~
48294 \begin_inset space ~
48300 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
48305 \begin_layout Description
48310 PostScript format using the program
48319 options see section
48320 \begin_inset space ~
48324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48326 reference "subsec:General-output"
48334 \begin_layout Description
48335 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48336 source and also code in the statistical programming language
48349 it is possible to use
48353 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48357 \begin_layout Standard
48358 If one of the menu entries
48366 \begin_inset space ~
48376 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48378 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
48381 \begin_inset space ~
48385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48387 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
48393 \begin_inset Index idx
48398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48399 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
48408 \begin_layout Subsection
48412 \begin_layout Standard
48413 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
48416 \begin_inset space ~
48420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48422 reference "sec:Paths"
48428 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
48437 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
48438 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
48439 's preferences as described in section
48440 \begin_inset space ~
48444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48446 reference "subsec:Converters"
48454 \begin_layout Subsection
48455 New and Close Window
48458 \begin_layout Standard
48459 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48463 \begin_layout Subsection
48467 \begin_layout Standard
48468 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
48471 \begin_layout Section
48473 \begin_inset Index idx
48478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48480 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48497 \begin_layout Subsection
48501 \begin_layout Standard
48502 Described in section
48503 \begin_inset space ~
48507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48509 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
48517 \begin_layout Subsection
48525 \begin_layout Standard
48526 Described in section
48527 \begin_inset space ~
48531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48533 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48541 \begin_layout Subsection
48545 \begin_layout Standard
48546 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
48547 If the cursor is outside an inset,
48548 the whole document will be selected.
48551 \begin_layout Subsection
48555 \begin_layout Standard
48556 Selects the whole document.
48559 \begin_layout Subsection
48560 Find & Replace (Quick)
48563 \begin_layout Standard
48564 Described in section
48565 \begin_inset space ~
48569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48571 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48579 \begin_layout Subsection
48580 Find & Replace (Advanced)
48583 \begin_layout Standard
48584 Described in section
48585 \begin_inset space ~
48589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48591 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
48599 \begin_layout Subsection
48600 Move Paragraph Up/Down
48603 \begin_layout Standard
48604 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
48607 \begin_layout Subsection
48609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48613 \begin_layout Standard
48615 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48616 Described in section
48617 \begin_inset space ~
48621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48623 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48633 \begin_layout Subsection
48635 \begin_inset Index idx
48640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48642 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48659 \begin_layout Standard
48660 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
48661 line spacing and label width.
48662 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
48665 \begin_layout Standard
48666 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
48672 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48673 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48675 \begin_inset space ~
48681 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
48685 \begin_layout Subsection
48687 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
48691 \begin_layout Standard
48693 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48694 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
48698 \begin_layout Enumerate
48700 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
48701 Customize text properties by means of the
48707 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
48711 this is described in section
48712 \begin_inset space ~
48716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48718 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48726 \begin_layout Enumerate
48728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
48729 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
48731 Apply last settings
48734 \begin_layout Enumerate
48736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48737 Change the casing of selected text (
48754 \begin_layout Subsection
48756 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
48760 \begin_layout Standard
48762 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48763 This sub-menu only appears
48764 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
48766 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48767 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
48793 \begin_inset space ~
48797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48799 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
48809 \begin_layout Subsection
48810 Table and Rows & Columns
48813 \begin_layout Standard
48814 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
48815 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
48816 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
48819 \begin_layout Subsection
48823 \begin_layout Standard
48824 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
48825 It will dissolve this inset.
48826 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
48829 \begin_layout Subsection
48833 \begin_layout Standard
48834 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
48835 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
48838 \begin_layout Subsection
48839 Increase/Decrease List Depth
48842 \begin_layout Standard
48843 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
48844 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
48845 \begin_inset space ~
48849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48851 reference "sec:Nesting"
48857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48859 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48867 \begin_layout Section
48869 \begin_inset Index idx
48874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48876 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48893 \begin_layout Standard
48894 At the bottom of the
48898 menu the opened documents are listed.
48901 \begin_layout Subsection
48902 Open/Close all Insets
48905 \begin_layout Standard
48906 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
48909 \begin_layout Subsection
48910 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
48913 \begin_layout Standard
48914 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
48917 \begin_layout Standard
48918 Math macros are described in the
48925 \begin_layout Subsection
48929 \begin_layout Standard
48930 Shows the outline window as described in sections
48931 \begin_inset space ~
48935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48937 reference "sec:Navigating"
48943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48945 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
48953 \begin_layout Subsection
48957 \begin_layout Standard
48958 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
48959 as described in section
48960 \begin_inset space ~
48964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48966 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48974 \begin_layout Subsection
48978 \begin_layout Standard
48979 Opens a window showing console messages.
48980 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
48982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48986 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
48987 is processing the document.
48990 \begin_layout Subsection
48992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48994 name "subsec:Toolbars"
48999 \begin_inset Index idx
49004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49013 \begin_layout Standard
49014 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
49015 All toolbars and the
49018 \begin_inset space ~
49036 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
49038 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
49040 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
49044 \begin_layout Standard
49046 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
49050 \begin_inset space ~
49071 \begin_inset space ~
49084 \begin_inset space ~
49089 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
49092 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
49097 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
49099 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
49114 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
49115 denoted in the menu with the suffix
49124 \begin_layout Standard
49129 state the toolbar is permanently shown
49130 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
49136 state it is never shown
49143 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
49144 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
49145 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively
49146 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
49148 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
49153 \begin_layout Standard
49155 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
49156 \begin_inset space ~
49160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49162 reference "sec:Toolbars"
49170 \begin_layout Subsection
49174 \begin_layout Standard
49178 \begin_inset space ~
49182 \begin_inset space ~
49186 \begin_inset space ~
49190 \begin_inset space ~
49194 \begin_inset space ~
49198 \begin_inset space ~
49203 will split \SpecialChar LyX
49204 's main window vertically while
49207 \begin_inset space ~
49211 \begin_inset space ~
49215 \begin_inset space ~
49219 \begin_inset space ~
49223 \begin_inset space ~
49227 \begin_inset space ~
49232 will split it horizontally.
49233 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
49234 or to view the same document,
49235 but at different positions.
49236 You can even split the main window several times to view,
49238 three or more documents at the same time.
49239 To close a split view,
49243 \begin_inset space ~
49247 \begin_inset space ~
49255 \begin_layout Subsection
49259 \begin_layout Standard
49260 Closes a split view.
49263 \begin_layout Subsection
49267 \begin_layout Standard
49268 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
49269 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
49270 's main window fullscreen.
49271 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
49273 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
49276 \begin_layout Section
49278 \begin_inset Index idx
49283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49285 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49302 \begin_layout Subsection
49306 \begin_layout Standard
49307 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
49308 \begin_inset space ~
49312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49314 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
49326 \begin_layout Subsection
49328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49330 name "subsec:Special-Character"
49337 \begin_layout Standard
49338 Here you can insert the following characters:
49341 \begin_layout Description
49346 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
49348 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
49349 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49350 -packages you have installed.
49351 You can get a complete display by checking
49354 \begin_inset space ~
49360 \begin_inset Newline newline
49364 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49373 Not all characters will be visible in the
49377 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
49378 \begin_inset space ~
49382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49384 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49389 ) can display every character.
49397 \begin_layout Description
49398 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
49403 \begin_layout Description
49405 \begin_inset space ~
49409 \begin_inset space ~
49412 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
49413 \begin_inset space ~
49417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49419 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
49427 \begin_layout Description
49429 \begin_inset space ~
49432 Quote Inserts this quote:
49434 no matter what quote style you selected in the
49436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49437 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49443 \begin_layout Description
49445 \begin_inset space ~
49448 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
49450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49451 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49457 \begin_layout Description
49459 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
49461 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
49465 \begin_inset space ~
49468 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
49469 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
49471 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
49475 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
49479 \begin_layout Description
49481 \begin_inset space ~
49484 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
49485 \SpecialChar breakableslash
49489 \begin_layout Description
49491 \begin_inset space ~
49495 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
49496 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
49502 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49507 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49513 \begin_inset space \space{}
49516 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49517 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49527 To insert a fraction use the command
49532 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49536 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49545 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49552 \begin_layout Description
49554 \begin_inset space ~
49557 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
49558 \SpecialChar menuseparator
49562 \begin_layout Description
49564 \begin_inset space ~
49568 \begin_inset Index idx
49573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49580 \begin_inset Index idx
49585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49587 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49601 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
49602 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49608 \begin_inset Index idx
49613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49616 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49631 \begin_inset Newline newline
49634 More information about this feature can be found in the
49640 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49646 \begin_layout Description
49647 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
49652 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
49656 \begin_layout Subsection
49660 \begin_layout Standard
49661 Opens a submenu with the following options:
49664 \begin_layout Description
49665 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
49667 \begin_inset script superscript
49669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49679 \begin_layout Description
49680 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
49682 \begin_inset script subscript
49684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49693 \begin_layout Description
49695 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
49697 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
49701 \begin_inset space ~
49705 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
49707 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
49710 space as described in section
49711 \begin_inset space ~
49715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49717 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
49725 \begin_layout Description
49727 \begin_inset space ~
49730 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
49731 \begin_inset space ~
49735 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
49737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49739 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
49745 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
49747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49749 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
49759 \begin_layout Description
49761 \begin_inset space ~
49764 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
49765 \begin_inset space ~
49769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49771 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
49779 \begin_layout Description
49781 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
49783 \begin_inset space ~
49786 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49792 \begin_inset space \space{}
49795 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49796 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49806 To insert a fraction use the command
49811 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49815 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49824 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49833 \begin_layout Description
49835 \begin_inset space ~
49838 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
49839 \begin_inset space ~
49843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49845 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
49853 \begin_layout Description
49855 \begin_inset space ~
49858 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
49859 \begin_inset space ~
49863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49865 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
49873 \begin_layout Description
49875 \begin_inset space ~
49878 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
49879 \begin_inset space ~
49883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49885 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
49893 \begin_layout Description
49894 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
49895 \begin_inset space ~
49899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49901 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
49909 \begin_layout Description
49911 \begin_inset space ~
49914 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
49915 \begin_inset space ~
49919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49921 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
49929 \begin_layout Description
49931 \begin_inset space ~
49934 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
49935 \begin_inset space ~
49939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49941 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
49949 \begin_layout Description
49951 \begin_inset space ~
49955 \begin_inset space ~
49958 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
49960 \begin_inset space ~
49964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49966 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
49974 for a usage example.
49977 \begin_layout Description
49979 \begin_inset space ~
49983 \begin_inset space ~
49986 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
49987 \begin_inset space ~
49991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49993 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
50001 \begin_layout Description
50003 \begin_inset space ~
50006 Break Inserts a forced line break that
50007 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
50010 justifies the remaining text as described in section
50011 \begin_inset space ~
50015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50017 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
50025 \begin_layout Description
50027 \begin_inset space ~
50030 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
50031 \begin_inset space ~
50035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50037 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
50045 \begin_layout Description
50047 \begin_inset space ~
50050 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
50051 as described in section
50052 \begin_inset space ~
50056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50058 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
50064 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
50068 \begin_layout Description
50070 \change_deleted 5863208 1686701518
50072 \change_inserted 5863208 1686701520
50074 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
50076 \begin_inset space ~
50080 \begin_inset space ~
50083 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
50084 to prevent a page break at the given position.
50086 \begin_inset space ~
50090 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
50092 \begin_inset space ~
50096 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
50098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50100 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
50110 \begin_layout Description
50112 \begin_inset space ~
50115 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
50116 \begin_inset space ~
50120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50122 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
50130 \begin_layout Description
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50136 \begin_inset space ~
50139 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
50140 \begin_inset space ~
50144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50146 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
50154 \begin_layout Subsection
50156 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50160 \begin_layout Standard
50162 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50163 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
50164 The submenu allows you to insert
50167 \begin_layout Description
50169 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50171 \begin_inset space ~
50174 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
50177 \begin_layout Description
50179 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50181 \begin_inset space ~
50185 \begin_inset space ~
50188 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
50191 \begin_layout Description
50193 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50195 \begin_inset space ~
50198 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
50201 \begin_layout Description
50203 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50205 \begin_inset space ~
50208 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
50211 \begin_layout Description
50213 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50215 \begin_inset space ~
50219 \begin_inset space ~
50222 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
50225 \begin_layout Description
50227 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50229 \begin_inset space ~
50232 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
50235 \begin_layout Description
50237 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
50239 \begin_inset space ~
50243 \begin_inset space ~
50247 \begin_inset space ~
50250 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
50253 \begin_layout Description
50255 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
50257 \begin_inset space ~
50261 \begin_inset space ~
50264 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
50266 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
50269 \begin_layout Description
50271 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50273 \begin_inset space ~
50276 Name inserts the user name as specified in
50278 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50279 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50285 \begin_layout Description
50287 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50289 \begin_inset space ~
50292 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
50294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50295 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50301 \begin_layout Description
50303 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50304 Other\SpecialChar ldots
50305 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
50308 \begin_layout Subsection
50311 List/Contents/References
50314 \begin_layout Standard
50315 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
50319 \begin_inset space ~
50343 are described in section
50344 \begin_inset space ~
50348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50350 reference "sec:toc"
50360 is described in section
50361 \begin_inset space ~
50365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50367 reference "sec:Index"
50377 is described in section
50378 \begin_inset space ~
50382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50384 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50391 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50394 is described in section
50395 \begin_inset space ~
50399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50401 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50409 \begin_layout Subsection
50413 \begin_layout Standard
50415 as described in section
50416 \begin_inset space ~
50420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50422 reference "sec:Floats"
50427 and in detail the chapter
50434 \begin_inset space ~
50442 \begin_layout Subsection
50446 \begin_layout Standard
50448 described in section
50449 \begin_inset space ~
50453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50455 reference "sec:Notes"
50463 \begin_layout Subsection
50467 \begin_layout Standard
50468 Inserts a branch inset,
50470 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
50471 Branches are described in section
50472 \begin_inset space ~
50476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50478 reference "sec:Branches"
50486 \begin_layout Subsection
50490 \begin_layout Standard
50491 Inserts document class-specific insets.
50492 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
50493 An example is the document class
50494 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
50496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50504 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
50508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50513 with three custom insets.
50516 Flex insets and InsetLayout
50520 Installing New Document Classes,
50521 The Layout file format
50527 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
50530 \begin_layout Subsection
50532 \begin_inset Index idx
50537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50546 \begin_layout Standard
50547 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
50548 For more information see chapter
50550 External Document Parts
50553 \begin_inset space ~
50559 \begin_layout Subsection
50561 \begin_inset Index idx
50566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50575 \begin_layout Standard
50576 Inserts a box in a certain style.
50577 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
50584 \begin_inset space ~
50592 \begin_layout Subsection
50596 \begin_layout Standard
50601 dialog as described in section
50602 \begin_inset space ~
50606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50608 reference "sec:Bibliography"
50616 \begin_layout Subsection
50620 \begin_layout Standard
50625 as described in section
50626 \begin_inset space ~
50630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50632 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50640 \begin_layout Subsection
50644 \begin_layout Standard
50649 as described in section
50650 \begin_inset space ~
50654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50656 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50664 \begin_layout Subsection
50666 \begin_inset Index idx
50671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50678 \begin_inset Index idx
50683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50685 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50695 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50712 \begin_layout Standard
50713 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
50714 Floats are described in section
50715 \begin_inset space ~
50719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50721 reference "sec:Floats"
50727 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
50730 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
50738 \begin_inset space ~
50746 \begin_layout Subsection
50750 \begin_layout Standard
50751 Inserts an index entry as described in section
50752 \begin_inset space ~
50756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50758 reference "sec:Index"
50766 \begin_layout Subsection
50770 \begin_layout Standard
50771 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
50772 \begin_inset space ~
50776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50778 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50786 \begin_layout Subsection
50790 \begin_layout Standard
50791 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
50792 Tables are described in section
50793 \begin_inset space ~
50797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50799 reference "sec:Tables"
50804 and in detail in the chapter
50811 \begin_inset space ~
50819 \begin_layout Subsection
50823 \begin_layout Standard
50829 Graphics are described in section
50830 \begin_inset space ~
50834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50836 reference "sec:Graphics"
50844 \begin_layout Subsection
50848 \begin_layout Standard
50849 Inserts a URL as described in section
50850 \begin_inset space ~
50854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50856 reference "subsec:URLs"
50864 \begin_layout Subsection
50868 \begin_layout Standard
50869 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
50870 \begin_inset space ~
50874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50876 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
50884 \begin_layout Subsection
50888 \begin_layout Standard
50889 Inserts a footnote as described in section
50890 \begin_inset space ~
50894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50896 reference "sec:Footnotes"
50904 \begin_layout Subsection
50908 \begin_layout Standard
50909 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
50910 \begin_inset space ~
50914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50916 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
50924 \begin_layout Subsection
50927 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
50930 \begin_layout Standard
50931 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
50933 \begin_inset space ~
50937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50939 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
50944 for an explanation.
50947 \begin_layout Subsection
50951 \begin_layout Standard
50952 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
50953 in or behind a section heading,
50954 title or caption of a float.
50955 Inserts a short title as described in section
50956 \begin_inset space ~
50960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50962 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
50970 \begin_layout Subsection
50975 \begin_layout Standard
50976 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
50977 Code box as described in section
50978 \begin_inset space ~
50982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50984 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
50992 \begin_layout Subsection
50994 \begin_inset Index idx
50999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51008 \begin_layout Standard
51009 Inserts a program listings box.
51010 Program listings are explained in the chapter
51012 Program Code Listings
51017 \begin_inset space ~
51025 \begin_layout Subsection
51027 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
51031 \begin_layout Standard
51033 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
51034 Inserts the actual date.
51035 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
51041 \begin_layout Subsection
51045 \begin_layout Standard
51046 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
51047 \begin_inset space ~
51051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51053 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
51061 \begin_layout Section
51063 \begin_inset Index idx
51068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51070 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51087 \begin_layout Standard
51088 This menu lists the existing chapters,
51093 \begin_inset space ~
51096 of the current document.
51097 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
51100 \begin_layout Subsection
51104 \begin_layout Standard
51105 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
51106 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
51109 \begin_inset space ~
51113 To create bookmarks for this example,
51115 \begin_inset space ~
51118 2.5 and use the submenu
51121 \begin_inset space ~
51125 \begin_inset space ~
51132 \begin_inset space ~
51138 \begin_inset space ~
51142 \begin_inset space ~
51148 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
51151 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
51157 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
51160 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
51163 \begin_layout Standard
51165 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
51166 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
51172 \begin_inset space ~
51177 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
51180 \begin_inset space ~
51185 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
51188 \begin_layout Subsection
51194 \begin_layout Standard
51195 Jump to the next note,
51197 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
51200 \begin_layout Subsection
51204 \begin_layout Standard
51205 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
51206 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
51207 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
51210 \begin_inset space ~
51214 \begin_inset space ~
51222 \begin_layout Subsection
51226 \begin_layout Standard
51227 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
51230 The \SpecialChar LyX
51231 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
51233 \begin_inset space ~
51241 \begin_inset space ~
51246 manual for a detailed description.
51249 \begin_layout Section
51251 \begin_inset Index idx
51256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51258 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51275 \begin_layout Subsection
51279 \begin_layout Standard
51280 Change Tracking is described in section
51281 \begin_inset space ~
51285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51287 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51295 \begin_layout Subsection
51303 \begin_layout Standard
51304 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
51305 by viewing or exporting a document,
51306 this menu will be enabled.
51307 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51309 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
51311 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
51312 \begin_inset Newline newline
51315 With the help of the logfile,
51316 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51320 \begin_layout Standard
51323 Open Containing Directory
51325 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
51326 's temporary folder for the document.
51327 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
51328 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
51329 For example some journals require to send the
51333 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51337 \begin_layout Subsection
51338 Start Appendix Here
51341 \begin_layout Standard
51342 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
51343 \begin_inset space ~
51347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51349 reference "sec:Appendices"
51357 \begin_layout Subsection
51359 \begin_inset space ~
51365 \begin_layout Standard
51366 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
51368 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51369 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51370 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51372 \begin_inset space ~
51376 \begin_inset space ~
51383 \begin_inset space ~
51387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51389 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51394 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
51397 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51398 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51400 \begin_inset space ~
51403 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51405 \begin_inset space ~
51408 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51410 \begin_inset space ~
51414 \begin_inset space ~
51421 \begin_inset space ~
51425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51427 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51432 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
51433 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
51435 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51436 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51438 \begin_inset space ~
51441 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51443 \begin_inset space ~
51446 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51451 \begin_inset space ~
51455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51457 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51463 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51464 when it is first configured.
51465 The default output format is
51468 \begin_inset space ~
51476 \begin_layout Subsection
51477 View (Other Formats)
51480 \begin_layout Standard
51481 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
51482 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
51483 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
51484 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51485 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
51487 All possible formats are listed in section
51488 \begin_inset space ~
51492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51494 reference "subsec:Export"
51500 You should at least see the menu entry
51506 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51508 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
51510 \begin_inset space ~
51514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51516 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51522 \begin_inset Index idx
51527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51528 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51537 \begin_layout Standard
51538 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
51539 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
51541 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51542 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51544 \begin_inset space ~
51547 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51549 \begin_inset space ~
51552 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51557 \begin_inset space ~
51561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51563 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51569 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51570 when it is first configured.
51573 \begin_layout Subsection
51575 \begin_inset space ~
51581 \begin_layout Standard
51582 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
51585 \begin_layout Subsection
51586 Update (Other Formats)
51589 \begin_layout Standard
51590 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
51593 \begin_layout Subsection
51594 View Master Document
51597 \begin_layout Standard
51598 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51614 \begin_inset space ~
51619 manual for more information on this topic).
51620 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
51622 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
51626 \begin_inset space ~
51630 \begin_inset space ~
51635 generates the output of the whole book,
51640 will just output the chapter alone.
51643 \begin_layout Standard
51644 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51646 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51647 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51648 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51650 \begin_inset space ~
51654 \begin_inset space ~
51661 \begin_inset space ~
51665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51667 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51672 ) or in the preferences (menu
51674 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51675 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51677 \begin_inset space ~
51680 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51682 \begin_inset space ~
51685 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51687 \begin_inset space ~
51691 \begin_inset space ~
51698 \begin_inset space ~
51702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51704 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51712 \begin_layout Subsection
51713 Update Master Document
51716 \begin_layout Standard
51717 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51733 \begin_inset space ~
51738 manual for more information on this topic).
51739 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
51742 \begin_layout Standard
51743 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51745 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51746 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51747 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51749 \begin_inset space ~
51753 \begin_inset space ~
51760 \begin_inset space ~
51764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51766 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51771 ) or in the preferences (menu
51773 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51774 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51776 \begin_inset space ~
51779 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51781 \begin_inset space ~
51784 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51786 \begin_inset space ~
51790 \begin_inset space ~
51797 \begin_inset space ~
51801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51803 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51811 \begin_layout Subsection
51813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51815 name "subsec:Compressed"
51822 \begin_layout Standard
51823 Un/compresses the current document.
51824 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
51826 Additional Features
51828 manual for details).
51831 \begin_layout Subsection
51835 \begin_layout Standard
51836 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
51839 \begin_layout Subsection
51843 \begin_layout Standard
51844 The document settings are described in appendix
51845 \begin_inset space ~
51849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51851 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
51859 \begin_layout Section
51861 \begin_inset Index idx
51866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51868 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51885 \begin_layout Subsection
51889 \begin_layout Standard
51890 Spell checking is explained in section
51891 \begin_inset space ~
51895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51897 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51905 \begin_layout Subsection
51909 \begin_layout Standard
51910 The thesaurus is described in section
51911 \begin_inset space ~
51915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51917 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
51925 \begin_layout Subsection
51927 \begin_inset Index idx
51932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51939 \begin_inset Index idx
51944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51953 \begin_layout Standard
51954 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
51957 \begin_layout Subsection
51963 \begin_inset Index idx
51968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51969 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51978 \begin_layout Standard
51979 Generates with the help of the program
51981 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51984 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
51985 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
51986 This feature is not available on Windows.
51989 \begin_layout Subsection
51995 \begin_inset Index idx
52000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52010 \begin_layout Standard
52011 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
52016 \begin_inset space ~
52021 to see the full filename paths.
52024 \begin_layout Subsection
52026 \begin_inset Index idx
52031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52040 \begin_layout Standard
52041 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
52042 files as described in section
52043 \begin_inset space ~
52047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52049 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
52057 \begin_layout Subsection
52059 \begin_inset Index idx
52064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52067 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52077 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
52080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52081 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
52093 \begin_inset Index idx
52098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52099 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
52108 \begin_layout Standard
52109 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
52113 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52114 -packages and programs it needs;
52116 \begin_inset space ~
52120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52122 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
52130 \begin_layout Subsection
52134 \begin_layout Standard
52139 dialog as described in detail in appendix
52140 \begin_inset space ~
52144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52146 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
52154 \begin_layout Section
52156 \begin_inset Index idx
52161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52163 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52180 \begin_layout Standard
52181 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
52182 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
52184 If a file is not available in this language,
52185 the English version will be listed.
52188 \begin_layout Standard
52192 \begin_inset space ~
52197 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
52198 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52199 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
52201 \begin_inset space ~
52205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52207 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
52215 \begin_layout Standard
52219 \begin_inset space ~
52224 gives information about the copyright,
52225 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
52226 version you are using.
52229 \begin_layout Section
52231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52233 name "sec:Toolbars"
52240 \begin_layout Standard
52241 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
52242 \begin_inset space ~
52246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52248 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
52256 \begin_layout Standard
52257 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
52258 This is described in the
52260 Additional Features
52265 \begin_layout Subsection
52267 \begin_inset Index idx
52272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52274 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52291 \begin_layout Standard
52292 \begin_inset Graphics
52293 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
52301 \begin_layout Standard
52302 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52308 \begin_layout Standard
52309 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
52313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52325 \begin_inset Note Note
52328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52329 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
52334 manual for more information.
52342 \begin_layout Standard
52343 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52349 \begin_layout Standard
52350 \begin_inset Tabular
52351 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
52352 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52360 \begin_inset Graphics
52361 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
52371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52375 pull-down box for the environments
52388 \begin_layout Standard
52389 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
52395 \begin_layout Standard
52397 \begin_inset Tabular
52398 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
52399 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52400 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52401 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52402 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52425 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52455 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52485 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52492 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52501 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
52509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52515 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52531 arg "spelling-continuously"
52539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52543 Spellcheck continuously
52549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52572 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52632 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52662 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52694 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
52699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52717 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
52725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52731 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52757 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
52765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52771 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52799 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
52807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52813 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52814 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
52821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52844 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
52847 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52849 \begin_inset space ~
52852 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52854 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
52860 arg "dialog-show character"
52871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52892 Set text to noun style,
52894 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
52897 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52899 \begin_inset space ~
52902 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52904 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
52910 arg "dialog-show character"
52921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52927 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
52930 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
52938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52943 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
52946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52959 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
52964 arg "textstyle-apply"
52974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52979 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
52980 Format text using the current settings in the
52982 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52984 \begin_inset space ~
52987 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52998 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53022 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53024 \begin_inset space ~
53033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53042 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
53050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53070 arg "tabular-insert"
53078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53097 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
53100 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
53108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53113 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
53116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53132 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
53140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53144 Toggle outline window on/off,
53147 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
53154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53163 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
53171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53175 Toggle math toolbar on/off
53181 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53190 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
53198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53202 Toggle table toolbar on/off
53215 \begin_layout Subsection
53217 \begin_inset Index idx
53222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53224 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53241 \begin_layout Standard
53242 \begin_inset Graphics
53243 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
53251 \begin_layout Standard
53252 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53258 \begin_layout Standard
53259 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
53262 \begin_layout Standard
53263 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53269 \begin_layout Standard
53270 \begin_inset Tabular
53271 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
53272 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
53273 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53274 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53302 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53311 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
53319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53329 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53338 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
53346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53365 arg "layout-toggle List"
53373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53392 arg "layout-toggle Description"
53400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53419 arg "depth-increment"
53427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53435 \begin_inset space ~
53439 \begin_inset space ~
53448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53457 arg "depth-decrement"
53465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53471 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53473 \begin_inset space ~
53477 \begin_inset space ~
53486 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53495 arg "float-insert figure"
53503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53509 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53510 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53517 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53526 arg "float-insert table"
53534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53541 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53578 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53587 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
53595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53608 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53617 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
53625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53663 \begin_inset space ~
53672 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53681 arg "nomencl-insert"
53689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53697 \begin_inset space ~
53706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53715 arg "footnote-insert"
53723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53745 arg "marginalnote-insert"
53753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53759 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53761 \begin_inset space ~
53770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53794 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
53796 \begin_inset space ~
53805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53814 arg "box-insert Frameless"
53822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53890 \begin_inset space ~
53899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53908 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
53916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53922 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53923 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53939 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
53947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53954 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53956 \begin_inset space ~
53965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53974 arg "dialog-show character"
53982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53988 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53990 \begin_inset space ~
53993 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
54000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54006 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
54011 arg "textstyle-apply"
54019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54024 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
54025 Format text using the recent settings in the
54028 arg "dialog-show character"
54037 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54046 arg "layout-paragraph"
54054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54060 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
54062 \begin_inset space ~
54071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54080 arg "thesaurus-entry"
54088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54094 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
54108 \begin_layout Subsection
54109 View/Update Toolbar
54110 \begin_inset Index idx
54115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54117 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54134 \begin_layout Standard
54135 \begin_inset Graphics
54136 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
54143 \begin_layout Standard
54144 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
54150 \begin_layout Standard
54151 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
54154 \begin_layout Standard
54155 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
54161 \begin_layout Standard
54162 \begin_inset Tabular
54163 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
54164 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
54165 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
54166 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
54167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54206 arg "buffer-update"
54214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54236 arg "master-buffer-view"
54244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54250 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54252 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
54254 \begin_inset space ~
54260 \begin_inset space ~
54269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54278 arg "master-buffer-update"
54286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54292 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54294 \begin_inset space ~
54298 \begin_inset space ~
54307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54316 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
54324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54330 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54331 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
54333 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
54335 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
54338 \SpecialChar menuseparator
54339 Synchronize with Output
54345 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54356 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
54366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54373 View (Other Formats)
54379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54386 arg "update-others"
54390 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
54398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54405 Update (Other Formats)
54418 \begin_layout Standard
54420 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
54421 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
54426 \begin_layout Subsection
54430 \begin_layout Standard
54431 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
54432 \begin_inset space ~
54436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54438 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
54445 \begin_inset Index idx
54450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54452 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54469 \begin_inset space ~
54474 manual and the math macro toolbar
54475 \begin_inset Index idx
54480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54482 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54503 \begin_layout Chapter
54504 The Document Settings
54505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54507 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
54512 \begin_inset Index idx
54517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54519 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54536 \begin_layout Standard
54540 \begin_inset space ~
54545 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
54547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54551 You can save your document settings as default with the
54553 Save as Document Defaults
54555 button in any dialog.
54556 This will create a template named
54560 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
54561 when you create a new document without using a template.
54564 \begin_layout Standard
54569 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
54570 This affects mostly class options,
54571 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
54574 \begin_layout Standard
54575 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
54576 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
54577 To find a setting quicker,
54578 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
54580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54584 \begin_inset space \space{}
54588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54596 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
54597 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
54598 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
54601 \begin_layout Section
54605 \begin_layout Standard
54606 Here you set the document class,
54609 and a master document.
54610 Document classes are described in section
54611 \begin_inset space ~
54615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54617 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
54625 \begin_layout Standard
54629 \begin_inset space ~
54634 you can load you own layout-file,
54635 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
54640 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
54641 as a layout for a document class.
54642 For more about layout-files,
54645 Installing New Document Classes,
54646 Types of Layout Files
54655 \begin_layout Standard
54656 Some classes use special class options by default.
54657 If this is the case,
54658 they are listed in the field
54662 and you can decide to use them or not.
54663 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
54664 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
54669 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54671 color and page layout packages.
54677 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54679 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
54683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54684 When you want to use one of the following drivers
54685 \begin_inset Newline newline
54699 \begin_inset Newline newline
54702 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54709 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54711 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
54724 \begin_layout Standard
54729 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
54730 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
54731 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
54732 This way child documents are always compilable.
54733 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
54740 \begin_inset space ~
54748 \begin_layout Standard
54749 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54759 \begin_inset Index idx
54764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54767 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54782 \begin_inset Index idx
54787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54804 for cross-references,
54806 \begin_inset space ~
54810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54812 reference "sec:Cross-References"
54820 \begin_layout Section
54824 \begin_layout Standard
54825 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
54826 Please refer to the section
54829 \begin_inset space ~
54837 \begin_inset space ~
54842 manual for details.
54845 \begin_layout Section
54849 \begin_layout Standard
54850 Modules are explained in section
54851 \begin_inset space ~
54855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54857 reference "subsec:Modules"
54865 \begin_layout Section
54869 \begin_layout Standard
54871 \begin_inset space ~
54875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54877 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
54885 \begin_layout Section
54889 \begin_layout Standard
54890 The document font settings are described in section
54891 \begin_inset space ~
54895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54897 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
54905 \begin_layout Section
54909 \begin_layout Standard
54910 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
54922 \begin_inset space ~
54927 and whether it should be a
54930 \begin_inset space ~
54935 can also be specified here.
54938 \begin_layout Standard
54939 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
54940 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
54941 That would be impractical,
54943 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
54945 it will be as you specified in the output.
54948 \begin_layout Standard
54951 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
54954 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
54955 justifies the text on screen.
54956 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
54958 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
54962 \begin_layout Standard
54964 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
54973 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
54978 \begin_layout Section
54982 \begin_layout Standard
54983 This dialog is described in sections
54984 \begin_inset space ~
54988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54990 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
54996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54998 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
55006 \begin_layout Section
55010 \begin_layout Standard
55011 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
55012 \begin_inset space ~
55016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55018 reference "subsec:Margins"
55026 \begin_layout Section
55028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55030 name "sec:Language-encodings"
55035 \begin_inset Index idx
55040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55042 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55059 \begin_layout Standard
55060 The document language and quote styles are set here.
55061 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
55062 (the \SpecialChar LyX
55063 file is always encoded in utf8).
55064 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
55065 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
55066 -command is not known for a particular character).
55067 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
55071 \begin_layout Standard
55073 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
55076 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
55077 files in Unicode – or utf8,
55078 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
55079 's default encoding).
55080 This should normally fit your needs,
55081 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
55082 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
55083 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
55084 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
55086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55094 encodings is necessary.
55097 \begin_layout Standard
55099 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
55101 provides support for these traditional encodings.
55104 Traditional (auto-selected)
55112 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).
55114 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
55118 \begin_layout Standard
55120 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
55121 If you use the option
55127 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
55130 If the document contains text in more than one language you
55131 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
55134 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55137 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
55138 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
55139 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
55144 \begin_layout Standard
55146 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
55155 any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
55157 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
55161 \begin_layout Standard
55163 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
55165 you can also select
55170 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
55171 Note that this encoding is then used for
55176 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
55179 \begin_layout Standard
55181 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55183 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
55187 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
55188 Do not load inputenc
55189 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55193 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
55195 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
55197 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55199 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
55200 in the next dropdown menu
55201 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55202 does what it states:
55204 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
55206 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
55208 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55209 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
55210 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55216 \begin_inset Index idx
55221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55223 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
55228 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55233 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
55247 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
55249 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
55251 Note that this option is only available for the standard
55257 Traditional (auto-selected)
55264 \begin_layout Standard
55266 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
55268 also supports Unicode output,
55269 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
55271 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
55272 installation supports Unicode),
55273 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
55274 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
55275 is quite incomplete,
55276 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
55280 (when \SpecialChar LyX
55281 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
55283 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
55284 -commands is not used,
55285 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
55286 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55287 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55289 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
55291 Both engines support Unicode natively.
55293 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
55296 \begin_inset space ~
55305 \begin_inset space ~
55313 \begin_inset space ~
55320 \begin_inset space ~
55324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55326 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
55332 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
55337 you might try out one of these new engines.
55342 \begin_layout Standard
55346 \begin_inset space ~
55351 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55352 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
55353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55361 The possible settings are:
55364 \begin_layout Description
55365 Default uses the language package that is selected in
55367 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
55368 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
55372 \begin_inset space ~
55376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55378 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
55386 \begin_layout Description
55387 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
55388 In many cases this will be
55393 \begin_inset Index idx
55398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55416 If the newer package
55421 \begin_inset Index idx
55426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55429 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55443 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55444 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55445 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
55447 this package will be used instead of
55454 \begin_layout Description
55456 \begin_inset space ~
55467 would be more appropriate.
55470 \begin_layout Description
55471 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
55472 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
55476 (for German texts),
55480 \begin_inset Newline newline
55485 usepackage{ngerman}
55488 \begin_layout Description
55489 None will not use a language package.
55490 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
55493 \begin_layout Standard
55494 Here is a list with the important encodings:
55497 \begin_layout Description
55499 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
55501 \begin_inset space ~
55505 \begin_inset space ~
55509 \begin_inset space ~
55517 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55523 \begin_inset Index idx
55528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55531 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55547 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
55553 \begin_layout Description
55554 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
55555 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
55557 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
55559 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
55560 -commands are needed.
55562 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
55563 This is the same as the
55576 \begin_layout Description
55578 \begin_inset space ~
55582 \begin_inset space ~
55585 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
55588 \begin_layout Description
55590 \begin_inset space ~
55594 \begin_inset space ~
55597 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
55600 \begin_layout Description
55602 \begin_inset space ~
55605 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
55608 \begin_layout Description
55610 \begin_inset space ~
55614 \begin_inset space ~
55617 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
55618 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55619 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55622 \begin_layout Description
55624 \begin_inset space ~
55628 \begin_inset space ~
55631 8859-13) for Estonian,
55632 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55633 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
55636 \begin_layout Description
55638 \begin_inset space ~
55642 \begin_inset space ~
55645 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
55646 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55647 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55650 \begin_layout Description
55652 \begin_inset space ~
55656 \begin_inset space ~
55660 \begin_inset space ~
55663 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
55664 \begin_inset space ~
55670 \begin_layout Description
55672 \begin_inset space ~
55676 \begin_inset space ~
55680 \begin_inset space ~
55683 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
55690 Slovak and Slovenian
55693 \begin_layout Description
55695 \begin_inset space ~
55699 \begin_inset space ~
55702 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
55703 used especially on UNIX OSes,
55704 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55705 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55706 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55707 \begin_inset space ~
55711 \begin_inset space ~
55717 \begin_layout Description
55719 \begin_inset space ~
55723 \begin_inset space ~
55726 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
55727 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
55728 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55729 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55730 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55731 \begin_inset space ~
55735 \begin_inset space ~
55741 \begin_layout Description
55743 \begin_inset space ~
55747 \begin_inset space ~
55750 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
55753 \begin_layout Description
55755 \begin_inset space ~
55759 \begin_inset space ~
55762 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
55765 \begin_layout Description
55767 \begin_inset space ~
55771 \begin_inset space ~
55774 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
55777 Serbian and Ukrainian
55780 \begin_layout Description
55782 \begin_inset space ~
55785 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
55788 \begin_layout Description
55790 \begin_inset space ~
55793 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
55796 \begin_layout Description
55798 \begin_inset space ~
55802 \begin_inset space ~
55805 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
55808 \begin_layout Description
55810 \begin_inset space ~
55814 \begin_inset space ~
55820 \begin_layout Description
55822 \begin_inset space ~
55826 \begin_inset space ~
55829 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
55830 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
55833 \begin_layout Description
55835 \begin_inset space ~
55839 \begin_inset space ~
55845 \begin_layout Description
55847 \begin_inset space ~
55851 \begin_inset space ~
55854 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55855 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55861 \begin_inset Index idx
55866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55869 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55885 set the document language to
55890 \begin_layout Description
55892 \begin_inset space ~
55896 \begin_inset space ~
55899 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55900 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55907 set the document language to
55910 \begin_inset space ~
55916 \begin_layout Description
55918 \begin_inset space ~
55922 \begin_inset space ~
55925 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55926 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55932 \begin_inset Index idx
55937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55940 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55956 set the document language to
55961 \begin_layout Description
55963 \begin_inset space ~
55967 \begin_inset space ~
55970 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55971 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55978 set the document language to
55983 \begin_layout Description
55985 \begin_inset space ~
55989 \begin_inset space ~
55992 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
55993 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56000 set the document language to
56005 \begin_layout Description
56007 \begin_inset space ~
56010 (EUC-KR) for Korean
56013 \begin_layout Description
56015 \begin_inset space ~
56019 \begin_inset space ~
56023 \begin_inset space ~
56026 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
56028 Maltese and Turkish
56031 \begin_layout Description
56033 \begin_inset space ~
56037 \begin_inset space ~
56041 \begin_inset space ~
56044 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
56053 Romanian and Slovenian,
56054 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
56057 \begin_layout Description
56059 \begin_inset space ~
56063 \begin_inset space ~
56069 \begin_layout Description
56071 \begin_inset space ~
56075 \begin_inset space ~
56078 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
56079 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
56082 \begin_layout Description
56084 \begin_inset space ~
56088 \begin_inset space ~
56091 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56097 \begin_inset Index idx
56102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56105 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56119 (for the languages Chinese,
56120 Japanese and Korean)
56121 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
56123 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
56124 with the default encoding (
56126 Unicode (utf8) [default]
56132 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
56133 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
56138 \begin_layout Description
56140 \begin_inset space ~
56148 \begin_inset space ~
56151 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
56158 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
56162 which use Unicode directly,
56163 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56170 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
56171 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
56173 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
56176 \begin_layout Description
56178 \begin_inset space ~
56182 \begin_inset space ~
56185 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56191 \begin_inset Index idx
56196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56199 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56214 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
56220 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
56222 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
56223 This used to be more comprehensive than
56226 \begin_inset space ~
56232 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
56237 \begin_layout Description
56239 \begin_inset space ~
56242 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56248 \begin_inset Index idx
56253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56256 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56272 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
56273 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
56274 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
56275 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
56276 with the default encoding (
56278 Unicode (utf8) [default]
56284 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
56285 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
56290 \begin_layout Description
56292 \begin_inset space ~
56296 \begin_inset space ~
56300 \begin_inset space ~
56303 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
56304 \begin_inset space ~
56310 \begin_layout Description
56312 \begin_inset space ~
56316 \begin_inset space ~
56320 \begin_inset space ~
56323 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
56338 Spanish and Swedish;
56339 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
56342 \begin_layout Description
56344 \begin_inset space ~
56348 \begin_inset space ~
56352 \begin_inset space ~
56355 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
56356 but with the Euro currency sign,
56357 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
56360 \begin_layout Section
56362 \begin_inset Index idx
56367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56369 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56384 \begin_inset Index idx
56389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56391 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56406 \begin_inset Index idx
56411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56413 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56428 \begin_inset Index idx
56433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56435 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56452 \begin_layout Standard
56453 Here you can alter the font color for the
56462 \begin_inset space ~
56468 light grey)for the background color for the
56476 \begin_inset space ~
56487 sets the color back to the default.
56490 \begin_layout Standard
56491 Clicking any button showing
56499 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
56500 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
56503 \begin_layout Standard
56508 \begin_inset space ~
56513 font color and use the option
56516 \begin_inset space ~
56521 in the document settings under
56524 \begin_inset space ~
56530 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
56531 \begin_inset space ~
56535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56537 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56545 \begin_layout Standard
56546 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
56552 \begin_layout Standard
56556 \begin_inset space ~
56565 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
56567 \begin_inset space ~
56570 Code after a forced page break:
56573 \begin_layout Itemize
56574 For the page color:
56575 \begin_inset Newline newline
56582 pagecolor{color name}
56585 \begin_layout Itemize
56586 For the text color:
56587 \begin_inset Newline newline
56597 \begin_layout Standard
56598 You are restricted to one of
56640 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
56647 \begin_inset space ~
56653 \begin_inset Newline newline
56656 If you have changed a text or background color,
56657 you can use the following names to refer to them:
56660 \begin_layout Itemize
56666 \begin_inset Newline newline
56671 page_backgroundcolor
56674 \begin_layout Itemize
56678 \begin_inset space ~
56684 \begin_inset Newline newline
56692 \begin_layout Itemize
56696 \begin_inset space ~
56702 \begin_inset Newline newline
56710 \begin_layout Itemize
56714 \begin_inset space ~
56720 \begin_inset Newline newline
56728 \begin_layout Standard
56729 To see how to define and use custom colors,
56733 \begin_inset space ~
56741 \begin_inset space ~
56749 \begin_layout Section
56751 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
56755 \begin_layout Standard
56757 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
56758 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
56759 \begin_inset space ~
56763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56765 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
56774 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
56775 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
56778 \begin_layout Standard
56780 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56783 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
56786 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
56788 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56789 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
56790 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
56793 \begin_layout Section
56797 \begin_layout Standard
56798 Here you can adjust the
56802 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
56806 as described in section
56807 \begin_inset space ~
56811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56813 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
56819 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
56823 \begin_layout Standard
56825 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
56826 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
56827 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
56828 The most common one are:
56831 \begin_layout Description
56833 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
56834 right Line numbers to the right margin
56837 \begin_layout Description
56839 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
56840 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
56844 \begin_layout Description
56846 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
56847 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
56850 \begin_layout Description
56852 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
56853 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
56856 \begin_layout Description
56858 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
56859 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
56862 \begin_layout Description
56864 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
56866 \begin_inset space ~
56869 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
56874 \begin_layout Section
56878 \begin_layout Standard
56879 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56885 \begin_inset Index idx
56890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56893 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56913 \begin_inset Index idx
56918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56921 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56940 \begin_inset Index idx
56945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56963 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56967 Sectioned bibliography
56969 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56975 \begin_inset Index idx
56980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56983 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57003 you can select the style files and specify further options.
57005 you can select a document-specific
57009 for the generation of the bibliography.
57010 For a further description of these possibilities see section
57011 \begin_inset space ~
57015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57017 reference "sec:Bibliography"
57025 \begin_layout Section
57029 \begin_layout Standard
57030 Here you can define the
57034 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
57035 \begin_inset space ~
57039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57041 reference "sec:Index"
57049 \begin_layout Section
57053 \begin_layout Standard
57054 The PDF properties are explained in section
57055 \begin_inset space ~
57059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57061 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
57069 \begin_layout Section
57073 \begin_layout Standard
57074 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
57075 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57081 \begin_inset Index idx
57086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57089 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57109 \begin_inset Index idx
57114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57117 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57137 \begin_inset Index idx
57142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57145 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57165 \begin_inset Index idx
57170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57173 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57193 \begin_inset Index idx
57198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57201 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57221 \begin_inset Index idx
57226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57229 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57249 \begin_inset Index idx
57254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57257 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57277 \begin_inset Index idx
57282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57285 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57305 \begin_inset Index idx
57310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57313 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57332 \begin_inset Index idx
57337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57340 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57355 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
57358 \begin_layout Description
57359 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
57360 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
57361 -errors in formulas,
57362 ensure that you have this enabled.
57365 \begin_layout Description
57366 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
57367 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
57368 -errors in formulas,
57369 ensure that you have this enabled.
57372 \begin_layout Description
57373 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
57377 \begin_inset space ~
57389 \begin_layout Description
57390 esint is used for special integral characters,
57394 \begin_inset space ~
57406 \begin_layout Description
57407 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
57419 \begin_layout Description
57420 mathtools is used for the math commands
57461 and labeled arrows,
57462 see the corresponding sections in the
57469 \begin_layout Description
57470 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
57473 Chemical Symbols and Equations
57482 \begin_layout Description
57483 stackrel is used for the math command
57501 \begin_layout Description
57502 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
57505 \begin_layout Description
57506 undertilde is used for the math command
57515 Accents for one Character
57524 \begin_layout Section
57526 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
57528 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
57534 \begin_layout Standard
57536 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
57537 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
57540 \begin_layout Standard
57542 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
57543 The float placement options
57544 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
57547 are described in the section
57550 \begin_inset space ~
57554 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
57556 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
57564 \begin_inset space ~
57572 \begin_layout Section
57576 \begin_layout Standard
57577 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
57579 Program Code Listings
57584 \begin_inset space ~
57592 \begin_layout Section
57596 \begin_layout Standard
57597 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
57606 set to be used and set the
57611 The itemize environment is described in section
57612 \begin_inset space ~
57616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57618 reference "sec:Itemize"
57626 \begin_layout Standard
57627 You can furthermore specify a
57630 \begin_inset space ~
57635 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57636 command of the desired character.
57637 For example to use the € sign,
57638 you have to insert the command
57645 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
57647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57651 \begin_inset space \space{}
57655 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
57665 To find the command for a math symbol,
57666 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
57669 \begin_layout Standard
57670 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
57673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57679 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57680 -packages in the preamble (menu
57682 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
57683 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
57686 \begin_inset space ~
57692 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
57696 usepackage{textcomp}
57699 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
57703 usepackage{amssymb}
57713 \begin_layout Section
57717 \begin_layout Standard
57718 Branches are described in section
57719 \begin_inset space ~
57723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57725 reference "sec:Branches"
57733 \begin_layout Section
57735 \change_deleted 5863208 1685691759
57737 \change_inserted 5863208 1685691762
57741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57743 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
57750 \begin_layout Standard
57751 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
57754 \begin_layout Description
57756 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57758 \begin_inset space ~
57763 Save transient properties
57765 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57766 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57770 \begin_layout Itemize
57772 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57773 the activation of change tracking
57776 \begin_layout Itemize
57778 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57779 the output of tracked changes
57782 \begin_layout Itemize
57784 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57785 the recording of the document directory path.
57788 \begin_layout Standard
57790 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57791 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
57795 \begin_layout Description
57797 \begin_inset space ~
57801 \begin_inset space ~
57805 The format that is used when you enter
57806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57827 View Master Document
57828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57835 Update Master Document
57836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57843 menu or the toolbar.
57844 The default is set in
57846 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57847 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
57849 \begin_inset space ~
57852 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
57857 \begin_inset space ~
57861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57863 reference "sec:File-Formats"
57871 \begin_layout Description
57873 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692088
57875 \begin_inset space ~
57879 \begin_inset space ~
57883 \begin_inset space ~
57886 programs If this is switched on,
57892 option which is needed with some packages.
57893 Note that this comes with security risks,
57894 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57895 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
57899 \begin_layout Description
57901 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
57903 \begin_inset space ~
57907 \begin_inset space ~
57910 Options offers settings for the
57918 \begin_layout Itemize
57922 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
57924 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
57926 \begin_inset space ~
57932 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
57934 \begin_inset space ~
57938 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
57944 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
57946 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
57947 settings for the menu
57949 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57953 \begin_inset space ~
57957 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
57960 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
57961 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
57966 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57968 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
57970 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57973 or a detailed description see section
57975 Reverse DVI/PDF search
57980 \begin_inset space ~
57986 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
57990 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
57994 \begin_layout Itemize
57996 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
57999 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
58001 determines whether so-called
58002 \begin_inset Quotes els
58006 \begin_inset Quotes ers
58010 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
58011 \begin_inset Quotes els
58015 \begin_inset Quotes ers
58018 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
58019 (such as sections or captions),
58020 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
58022 This setting is on by default,
58023 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
58025 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
58026 you can uncheck this.
58027 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
58029 just leave it checked.
58035 \begin_layout Description
58037 \begin_inset space ~
58041 \begin_inset space ~
58044 Options offers settings for the export format
58052 \begin_inset space ~
58057 will assure that the output follows exactly version
58058 \begin_inset space ~
58061 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
58065 \begin_inset space ~
58070 settings are described in detail in section
58072 Math Output in XHTML
58077 \begin_inset space ~
58086 \begin_inset space ~
58090 \begin_inset space ~
58095 is used for the size of equations in the output.
58096 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692496
58100 \begin_layout Description
58102 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692661
58104 \begin_inset space ~
58108 \begin_inset space ~
58111 Options offers settings for the export format
58114 The details for the options are described in the chapter
58120 Additional Features
58127 \begin_layout Description
58129 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58131 \begin_inset space ~
58136 Save transient properties
58138 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
58139 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
58143 \begin_layout Itemize
58145 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58146 the activation of change tracking
58149 \begin_layout Itemize
58151 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58152 the output of tracked changes
58155 \begin_layout Itemize
58157 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58158 the recording of the document directory path.
58161 \begin_layout Standard
58163 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58164 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
58167 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
58172 \begin_layout Description
58174 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
58176 \begin_inset space ~
58180 \begin_inset space ~
58184 \begin_inset space ~
58187 programs If this is switched on,
58193 option which is needed with some packages.
58194 Note that this comes with security risks,
58195 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
58200 \begin_layout Section
58208 \begin_layout Standard
58209 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
58210 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
58212 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
58214 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
58217 \begin_layout Standard
58218 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58219 -syntax is given in section
58220 \begin_inset space ~
58224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58226 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
58234 \begin_layout Chapter
58240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58242 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
58247 \begin_inset Index idx
58252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58261 \begin_layout Standard
58262 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
58264 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
58268 It has the following submenus.
58271 \begin_layout Section
58275 \begin_layout Subsection
58279 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58280 User Interface File
58281 \begin_inset Index idx
58286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58288 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58303 \begin_inset Index idx
58308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58310 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58327 \begin_layout Standard
58328 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
58329 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
58337 \begin_layout Description
58342 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
58345 \begin_layout Description
58352 the menu entries in popup context menus
58355 \begin_layout Description
58360 specifies the toolbar buttons
58363 \begin_layout Standard
58364 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
58365 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
58368 \begin_layout Standard
58369 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
58383 entries must be finished with an explicit
58413 and in the case of the
58414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58426 The syntax for the entries is:
58429 \begin_layout Standard
58430 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58459 \begin_layout Standard
58461 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58464 All the \SpecialChar LyX
58465 -functions are listed in the menu
58467 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
58469 \begin_inset space ~
58477 \begin_layout Standard
58478 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
58484 \begin_layout Standard
58486 assuming you use the menu
58488 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
58491 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
58492 you can add the line
58495 \begin_layout Standard
58496 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58520 \begin_layout Standard
58522 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58537 to have the sixth bookmark.
58540 \begin_layout Standard
58544 \begin_inset space ~
58549 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
58550 's toolbar buttons.
58551 The currently available icon sets are compared in
58552 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58555 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
58561 \change_inserted 258250489 1697053558
58565 \begin_layout Standard
58567 \change_inserted 258250489 1697054388
58571 \begin_inset space ~
58575 \begin_inset space ~
58580 allows you to change the look and feel of \SpecialChar LyX
58581 's user interface control elements.
58582 There may be different choices available on different operating systems.
58583 On certain operating systems some styles may support dark mode while others don't.
58584 In order to use dark mode in \SpecialChar LyX
58585 you may first need to enable it in your system's settings.
58590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58594 \begin_layout Standard
58597 Enable tool tips in main work area
58599 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
58602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58606 \begin_layout Standard
58611 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
58612 should display in the menu
58614 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58616 \begin_inset space ~
58622 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58626 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58628 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58632 \begin_layout Standard
58634 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58635 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
58640 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
58641 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
58642 the text then appears centered.
58647 \begin_layout Subsection
58651 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58655 \begin_layout Standard
58658 Restore window layouts and geometries
58661 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58665 \begin_layout Standard
58668 Restore cursor positions
58670 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
58673 \begin_layout Standard
58676 Load opened files from last session
58678 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58682 \begin_layout Standard
58685 Clear all session information
58687 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
58688 sessions (cursor positions,
58689 names of last opened documents,
58693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58697 name "subsec:Backup documents"
58702 \begin_inset Index idx
58707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58709 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58726 \begin_layout Standard
58729 Backup original documents when saving
58731 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was
58732 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618729
58733 opened or when it was
58735 saved the last time.
58736 It is stored in the
58739 \begin_inset space ~
58745 \begin_inset space ~
58749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58751 reference "sec:Paths"
58756 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
58759 \begin_inset space ~
58765 The backup file has the file extension
58766 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618692
58770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58776 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618694
58780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58784 \change_inserted -712698321 1676618670
58785 and the same name than the original file.
58789 \begin_inset space ~
58795 the file has the full path in its file name,
58797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58812 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
58815 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618585
58821 \begin_layout Standard
58823 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622933
58826 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
58829 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
58830 These files which are stored as
58834 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
58835 Should \SpecialChar LyX
58836 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
58837 this file can be used as a resort.
58840 \begin_layout Standard
58842 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623063
58843 Please read section
58844 \begin_inset space ~
58848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58850 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
58854 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
58855 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
58860 \begin_layout Standard
58862 \change_deleted -712698321 1676619117
58869 you can specify the time between backup saves.
58874 \begin_layout Standard
58877 Save documents compressed by default
58879 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
58880 \begin_inset space ~
58884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58886 reference "subsec:Compressed"
58892 This applies to newly created documents only.
58893 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
58894 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619181
58898 \begin_layout Standard
58900 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619393
58903 Save the document directory path
58905 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
58907 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
58908 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
58913 \begin_layout Standard
58915 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618508
58916 Apart from that LyX autosaves document in regular intervals.
58917 It is used to restore unsaved changes in the document if the program crashes.
58918 The temporary file name is
58927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58928 Windows & work area
58931 \begin_layout Standard
58934 Open documents in tabs
58937 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58941 \begin_layout Standard
58946 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
58951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58953 \begin_inset space ~
58957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58959 reference "sec:Paths"
58964 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
58973 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58975 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
58976 instance is created for each file.
58979 \begin_layout Standard
58982 Single close-tab button
58985 there will only be one close button (
58995 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
58996 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
58997 Regardless of this option,
58998 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
59001 \begin_layout Standard
59002 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59011 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
59012 before the change takes effect.
59020 \begin_layout Standard
59025 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
59026 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
59028 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
59032 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
59033 and only want to close the view in once instance.
59036 \begin_layout Subsection
59038 \begin_inset Index idx
59043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59045 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59062 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
59069 \begin_layout Standard
59070 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
59074 \begin_layout Standard
59075 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59084 This section only deals with the fonts
59088 the \SpecialChar LyX
59090 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
59091 and set in the menu
59093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
59094 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
59105 \begin_layout Standard
59125 (depends on the system) as its
59128 \begin_inset space ~
59144 \begin_layout Standard
59145 You can change the font size with the
59152 \begin_layout Standard
59157 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
59159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59162 points have the size of 1
59163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59168 \begin_inset space ~
59172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59174 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
59180 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
59181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59185 The sizes are explained in detail in section
59186 \begin_inset space ~
59190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59192 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
59200 \begin_layout Subsection
59202 \begin_inset Index idx
59207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59209 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59225 \begin_inset Index idx
59230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59232 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59249 \begin_layout Standard
59250 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
59251 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
59258 \begin_layout Standard
59259 By checking the option
59263 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
59271 \begin_inset space ~
59275 \begin_inset space ~
59280 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
59283 \begin_layout Subsection
59285 \begin_inset Index idx
59290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59309 \begin_layout Standard
59310 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
59314 \begin_layout Standard
59319 enables previewing snippets of your document.
59320 This feature is described in section
59321 \begin_inset space ~
59325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59327 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
59335 \begin_layout Standard
59336 Checking the option
59339 \begin_inset space ~
59343 \begin_inset space ~
59347 \begin_inset space ~
59352 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
59355 \begin_layout Section
59357 \begin_inset Index idx
59362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59364 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59381 \begin_layout Subsection
59385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59389 \begin_layout Standard
59392 Cursor follows scrollbar
59394 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
59397 \begin_layout Standard
59398 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
59399 If you set the value to zero,
59400 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
59403 \begin_layout Standard
59406 Scroll below end of document
59408 is self-explanatory.
59411 \begin_layout Standard
59412 In \SpecialChar LyX
59413 one can jump from word to word by pressing
59420 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
59422 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
59423 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
59424 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
59428 \begin_layout Standard
59430 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
59433 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
59435 is only relevant in documents that
59441 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
59449 markup) with this option selected.
59450 It the option is not selected,
59451 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
59452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59457 \begin_inset Quotes els
59461 \begin_inset Quotes ers
59465 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
59466 dissolving from insets.
59477 \begin_inset Quotes els
59481 \begin_inset Quotes ers
59484 notwithstanding the state of this option.
59489 \begin_layout Standard
59492 Sort environments alphabetically
59494 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59497 \begin_layout Standard
59500 Group environments by their category
59502 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59505 \begin_layout Standard
59510 options determine the editing style for math macros,
59520 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
59524 \begin_layout Standard
59526 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59529 Search drive for cited files
59531 allows \SpecialChar LyX
59532 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
59535 \begin_inset space ~
59539 \begin_inset space ~
59543 \begin_inset space ~
59547 \begin_inset space ~
59550 Content\SpecialChar ldots
59553 context menu on a citation.
59557 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
59559 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59562 field determines the search pattern.
59564 \begin_inset space ~
59568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59570 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
59580 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59582 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59586 \begin_layout Standard
59588 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59589 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
59594 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
59595 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
59596 the text then appears centered.
59601 \begin_layout Subsection
59603 \begin_inset Index idx
59608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59615 \begin_inset Index idx
59620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59622 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59639 \begin_layout Standard
59644 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
59646 Several binding files are available,
59650 \begin_layout Description
59651 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
59654 \begin_layout Description
59655 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
59666 \begin_layout Description
59667 mac.bind a set of bindings for
59670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59678 \begin_layout Standard
59679 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
59685 and binding files for special languages.
59686 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
59688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59692 \begin_inset space \space{}
59696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59704 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
59705 in a certain language,
59707 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
59710 \begin_layout Standard
59711 Some binding files,
59717 only have a limited scope.
59718 When looking at the end of the file
59723 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
59726 \begin_layout Standard
59730 \begin_inset space ~
59734 \begin_inset space ~
59739 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
59742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59746 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
59751 \begin_inset Index idx
59756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59758 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59775 \begin_layout Standard
59776 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
59777 functions and the bound shortcuts.
59778 To find functions easily,
59779 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
59781 Show key-bindings containing
59784 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
59785 Insert there for example as keyword
59786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59793 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
59794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59803 one function can have more than one shortcut.
59804 All \SpecialChar LyX
59805 functions are also listed in the file
59810 that you will find in the
59817 \begin_layout Standard
59819 to add the shortcut
59828 select the function and press the
59833 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
59834 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
59837 \begin_layout Standard
59838 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
59839 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
59840 Function definition with “
59843 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
59845 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
59850 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
59852 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
59855 \begin_layout Standard
59856 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
59860 \begin_layout Standard
59861 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
59862 The syntax of the entries is:
59865 \begin_layout Standard
59871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59890 \begin_layout Standard
59893 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
59894 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
59895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59928 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
59929 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
59930 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
59931 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
59936 you needed to specify it as
59941 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
59942 you don't have to care for these specifics.
59944 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
59947 \begin_layout Subsection
59949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59951 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
59956 \begin_inset Index idx
59961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59968 \begin_inset Index idx
59973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59975 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59992 \begin_layout Standard
59993 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
59994 For the case where this is not possible,
59996 provides keyboard maps.
59999 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
60003 \begin_inset space ~
60007 \begin_inset space ~
60012 and select the keyboard map file named
60019 \begin_layout Standard
60034 you can select the first and second with
60037 arg "keymap-primary"
60043 arg "keymap-secondary"
60046 respectively or toggle between them with
60049 arg "keymap-toggle"
60055 \begin_layout Standard
60056 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
60059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60065 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
60073 \begin_layout Standard
60074 You can also specify the mouse
60076 Wheel scrolling speed
60079 The standard value is 1.0;
60080 higher values speed up the scrolling,
60081 lower ones slow it down.
60084 Middle mouse button pasting
60086 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
60089 \begin_layout Standard
60097 \begin_inset space ~
60101 \begin_inset space ~
60107 you can select a key for zooming.
60108 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
60109 the text is zoomed.
60112 \begin_layout Subsection
60116 \begin_layout Standard
60117 Input completion is described in section
60118 \begin_inset space ~
60122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60124 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
60132 \begin_layout Section
60134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60141 \begin_inset Index idx
60146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60153 \begin_inset Index idx
60158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60160 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60177 \begin_layout Standard
60178 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
60179 are normally determined during the installation.
60180 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
60183 \begin_layout Description
60185 \begin_inset space ~
60188 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
60189 's working directory.
60190 It is the default when you
60202 \begin_inset space ~
60210 \begin_layout Description
60212 \begin_inset space ~
60215 templates This directory
60216 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
60217 contains the templates that are shown
60218 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
60219 will be opened when you use the menu
60220 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
60225 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
60227 \begin_inset space ~
60231 \begin_inset space ~
60239 \begin_layout Description
60241 \begin_inset space ~
60244 files This directory
60245 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
60246 will be opened when you use the
60247 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
60248 contains the example files that are listed in
60251 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
60260 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
60262 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
60264 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
60270 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
60272 \begin_inset Newline newline
60276 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
60279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60289 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
60290 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
60300 \begin_layout Description
60302 \begin_inset space ~
60306 \begin_inset Index idx
60311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60313 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60327 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
60328 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
60329 \begin_inset space ~
60333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60335 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
60345 will be used to save the backups.
60346 \begin_inset Newline newline
60349 Backup files have the ending
60350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60360 \begin_layout Description
60362 \begin_inset space ~
60365 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
60366 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
60368 \begin_inset Newline newline
60376 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
60382 You can edit this file with the program
60391 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
60392 in its preferences under
60395 \begin_inset space ~
60401 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
60406 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
60408 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
60415 and \SpecialChar LyX
60416 need to be running the same time.
60417 \begin_inset Newline newline
60420 The pipe is also used for the
60426 \begin_inset space ~
60430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60432 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
60438 \begin_inset Newline newline
60441 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
60442 Server-Pipe on Windows,
60443 you must use this pipe name:
60444 \begin_inset Newline newline
60460 \begin_layout Description
60462 \begin_inset space ~
60465 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
60468 \begin_layout Description
60470 \begin_inset space ~
60473 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
60474 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60477 \begin_layout Description
60479 \begin_inset space ~
60482 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
60487 You only need to specify it if you are using
60491 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60492 For \SpecialChar LyX
60497 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
60500 \begin_layout Description
60502 \begin_inset space ~
60505 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
60506 When \SpecialChar LyX
60507 needs to use an external program,
60508 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
60509 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
60511 so you normally don't have to modify it.
60513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60521 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
60524 \begin_layout Description
60526 \begin_inset space ~
60529 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
60530 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
60531 code or in the document preamble.
60532 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
60533 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
60534 If files are included,
60535 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
60536 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
60538 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
60539 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
60542 \begin_layout Section
60546 \begin_layout Standard
60547 Here you can insert your
60556 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
60557 as described in section
60558 \begin_inset space ~
60562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60564 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
60570 to mark changes you make as yours.
60573 \begin_layout Section
60575 \begin_inset Index idx
60580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60582 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60597 \begin_inset Index idx
60602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60604 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60621 \begin_layout Subsection
60623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60625 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
60632 \begin_layout Description
60634 \begin_inset space ~
60638 \begin_inset space ~
60641 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
60643 You can find its actual translation status here:
60645 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60647 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
60653 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
60657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60659 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
60660 LaTeX Language Support
60665 \begin_layout Description
60667 \begin_inset space ~
60670 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
60671 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
60672 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
60673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60689 The most widespread language package is
60694 \begin_inset Index idx
60699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60702 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60717 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
60719 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
60720 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
60721 come with the alternative language package
60726 \begin_inset Index idx
60731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60734 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60748 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
60750 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
60755 The available selections are described in section
60756 \begin_inset space ~
60760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60762 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
60770 \begin_layout Description
60772 \begin_inset space ~
60776 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
60777 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
60778 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
60780 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
60784 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
60788 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
60790 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
60794 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
60795 that is used to switch to a different language
60796 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
60797 to start the package
60801 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
60802 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
60806 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
60807 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
60810 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60814 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60823 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
60831 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
60834 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
60836 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60841 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60859 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60860 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60868 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60873 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60879 this setting is ignored.
60884 \begin_layout Description
60886 \begin_inset space ~
60890 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
60897 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
60898 Use this if the language switch set in
60902 needs to be explicitly ended,
60907 's alternative command
60911 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
60912 \SpecialChar allowbreak
60915 end{otherlanguage*}
60919 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
60922 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off
60923 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
60929 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60931 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
60935 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60941 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
60947 this setting is ignored.
60952 \begin_layout Description
60954 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60956 \begin_inset space ~
60960 \begin_inset space ~
60963 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
60966 \begin_layout Description
60968 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60970 \begin_inset space ~
60974 \begin_inset space ~
60977 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60983 \begin_layout Description
60985 \begin_inset space ~
60989 \begin_inset space ~
60993 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
60995 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
60998 this option is set,
60999 the languages used in the document will be added
61000 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
61003 to the document class options
61004 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
61005 rather than the language package options.
61006 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
61011 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
61012 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
61014 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
61015 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
61017 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way
61021 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
61022 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
61031 \begin_layout Description
61033 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
61035 \begin_inset space ~
61039 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
61041 \begin_inset space ~
61045 \begin_inset space ~
61049 \begin_inset space ~
61055 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
61057 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
61060 this option is set,
61062 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
61063 the language switch defined in
61066 \begin_inset space ~
61071 is output at the beginning of the document,
61072 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
61073 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
61074 This might be needed if you use a non-default
61077 \begin_inset space ~
61082 or if a package resets the document language.
61084 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
61085 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
61086 documents start with the chosen document language.
61087 When this option is not set,
61091 \begin_inset space ~
61096 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
61098 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
61101 \begin_inset space ~
61111 \begin_layout Description
61113 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
61115 \begin_inset space ~
61119 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
61121 \begin_inset space ~
61125 \begin_inset space ~
61129 \begin_inset space ~
61135 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
61139 \begin_inset space ~
61143 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
61144 Set document language explicitly
61150 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
61152 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
61159 \begin_inset space ~
61165 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
61167 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
61171 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
61173 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
61176 the end of the document.
61177 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
61181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
61182 \paragraph_spacing single
61184 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
61190 \begin_layout Description
61192 \begin_inset space ~
61196 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
61198 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
61202 \begin_inset space ~
61206 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
61209 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
61211 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
61215 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
61218 in a language different
61219 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
61221 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
61224 the document language will be
61225 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
61226 marked (by default with a blue
61229 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
61231 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
61235 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
61239 \begin_layout Description
61241 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
61243 \begin_inset space ~
61247 \begin_inset space ~
61251 \begin_inset space ~
61256 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is switched via the operating system.
61257 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different scripts (e.
61258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61262 English and Hebrew:
61264 switching the keyboard to Hebrew will automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well,
61270 \begin_layout Description
61272 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
61274 \begin_inset space ~
61278 \begin_inset space ~
61281 support Enables the use of languages,
61282 written from right to left (RTL),
61289 \begin_layout Description
61291 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
61293 \begin_inset space ~
61297 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
61299 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
61303 \begin_inset space ~
61307 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
61308 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
61309 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
61311 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
61315 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
61317 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
61318 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
61322 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61324 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
61328 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
61333 \begin_layout Standard
61338 means that the cursor
61339 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
61340 follows the logic of the text direction,
61341 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
61343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61347 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
61348 Hebrew embedded in English),
61349 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
61354 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
61355 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
61356 right arrow in this specific case always means:
61361 in text (even if this means:
61368 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61369 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
61370 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
61371 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
61372 since the cursor then follows a coherent
61373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61384 \begin_layout Standard
61386 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
61392 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
61394 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
61395 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
61400 ) when coming from the left.
61401 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
61402 at the expense of the text logic.
61403 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61404 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
61405 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
61410 \begin_layout Subsubsection
61412 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
61416 \begin_layout Description
61418 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
61420 \begin_inset space ~
61424 \begin_inset space ~
61427 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
61429 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
61430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61436 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
61439 \begin_layout Description
61441 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
61443 \begin_inset space ~
61447 \begin_inset space ~
61450 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
61456 \begin_layout Subsection
61460 \begin_layout Standard
61461 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
61462 \begin_inset space ~
61466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61468 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
61476 \begin_layout Section
61480 \begin_layout Subsection
61482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61484 name "subsec:General-output"
61491 \begin_layout Description
61493 \begin_inset space ~
61496 search Commands that will be used for the menu
61498 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
61500 \begin_inset space ~
61506 For a detailed description see section
61508 Reverse DVI/PDF search
61513 \begin_inset space ~
61521 \begin_layout Description
61523 \begin_inset space ~
61526 Options Options for the program
61530 that is used for the export format
61536 \begin_inset space ~
61540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61542 reference "subsec:Export"
61548 Possible options are listed in the
61553 \begin_inset Newline newline
61557 \begin_inset Flex URL
61560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61562 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
61572 \begin_layout Description
61574 \begin_inset space ~
61578 \begin_inset space ~
61581 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
61583 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
61584 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
61586 \begin_inset space ~
61592 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
61595 \begin_layout Description
61597 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
61599 \begin_inset space ~
61603 \begin_inset Index idx
61608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61615 \begin_inset Index idx
61620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61622 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61636 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
61637 \begin_inset Newline newline
61641 \begin_inset Flex URL
61644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61646 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
61652 \begin_inset Newline newline
61655 For example the format
61656 \begin_inset Newline newline
61660 \begin_inset Newline newline
61663 prints the date as day/month/year.
61668 \begin_layout Description
61670 \begin_inset space ~
61674 \begin_inset space ~
61677 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
61678 is allowed to overwrite on export.
61681 \begin_layout Subsection
61687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61689 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
61694 \begin_inset Index idx
61699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61701 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61719 \begin_layout Description
61721 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
61723 \begin_inset space ~
61731 \begin_inset space ~
61735 \begin_inset space ~
61738 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
61743 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
61767 are used for Cyrillic.
61768 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
61770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61783 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
61784 sets up in the background.
61785 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
61790 \begin_layout Description
61792 \begin_inset space ~
61796 \begin_inset space ~
61800 \begin_inset space ~
61804 \begin_inset space ~
61807 options They only have an effect when the program
61811 is used as DVI-viewer,
61812 read its manual to find out more.
61815 \begin_layout Standard
61816 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
61817 But before you change something,
61818 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
61821 \begin_layout Description
61823 \begin_inset space ~
61826 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
61828 \begin_inset space ~
61832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61834 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
61842 \begin_layout Description
61844 \begin_inset space ~
61847 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
61849 \begin_inset space ~
61853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61855 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
61863 \begin_layout Description
61865 \begin_inset space ~
61868 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
61870 \begin_inset space ~
61874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61876 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
61884 \begin_layout Description
61890 \begin_inset space ~
61893 command Command for the program
61895 Check\SpecialChar TeX
61898 that is described in the section
61900 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
61905 Additional Features
61910 \begin_layout Standard
61911 There are additionally the following options:
61914 \begin_layout Description
61916 \begin_inset space ~
61920 \begin_inset space ~
61924 \begin_inset space ~
61928 \begin_inset space ~
61933 \begin_inset space ~
61936 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
61938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61955 to separate folders.
61956 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
61958 \begin_inset Index idx
61963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61970 \begin_inset Index idx
61975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61977 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61994 \begin_layout Description
61996 \begin_inset space ~
62000 \begin_inset space ~
62004 \begin_inset space ~
62008 \begin_inset space ~
62012 \begin_inset space ~
62016 \begin_inset space ~
62019 changes Removes all manually set
62025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
62026 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
62028 \begin_inset space ~
62033 dialog when changing the document class.
62036 \begin_layout Section
62038 \begin_inset space ~
62042 \begin_inset Index idx
62047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62056 \begin_layout Subsection
62058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62060 name "subsec:Converters"
62065 \begin_inset Index idx
62070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62079 \begin_layout Standard
62080 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
62081 You can modify converters or create new ones.
62082 To modify a converter,
62084 change the entry of the
62091 \begin_inset space ~
62096 field and press the
62101 To create a new converter,
62102 select an existing one,
62103 select a different format in the
62106 \begin_inset space ~
62116 field and press the
62123 \begin_layout Standard
62126 Converter File Cache
62133 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
62135 Maximum Age (in days
62138 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
62139 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
62142 \begin_layout Standard
62143 More about converters,
62144 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
62145 is described in the section
62156 \begin_layout Subsection
62158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62160 name "sec:File-Formats"
62165 \begin_inset Index idx
62170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62177 \begin_inset Index idx
62182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62191 \begin_layout Standard
62192 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
62202 programs that should be used for certain formats.
62205 \begin_layout Standard
62206 You can also define the
62208 Default output format
62210 that is used when you use
62214 View Master Document
62218 Update Master Document
62224 menu or the toolbar.
62227 \begin_layout Standard
62228 More about formats and their options is described in the section
62239 \begin_layout Standard
62240 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
62241 's temporary directory,
62242 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
62243 This is done by specifying a
62248 More about this is described in the section
62259 \begin_layout Chapter
62260 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
62262 \begin_inset Index idx
62267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62276 name "chap:Units-available-in"
62283 \begin_layout Standard
62285 \begin_inset space ~
62289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
62291 reference "tab:Units"
62296 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
62297 and used in this documentation.
62300 \begin_layout Standard
62301 \begin_inset Float table
62308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62309 \begin_inset Caption Standard
62311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62327 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
62333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62335 \begin_inset Tabular
62336 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
62337 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
62338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
62339 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
62340 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
62342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62493 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
62497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62764 scaled point (65536
62765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62832 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
62837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62956 % of original image width
62961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
63006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
63015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
63024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63045 \begin_layout Standard
63046 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
63049 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
63056 \begin_layout Bibliography
63057 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63058 LatexCommand bibitem
63065 The \SpecialChar LyX
63068 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63071 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
63077 \begin_inset Newline newline
63081 \begin_inset Flex URL
63084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63086 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
63094 \begin_layout Bibliography
63095 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63096 LatexCommand bibitem
63097 key "latexcompanion"
63102 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
63105 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
63106 Companion Second Edition.
63113 \begin_layout Bibliography
63114 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63115 LatexCommand bibitem
63121 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
63125 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
63133 \begin_layout Bibliography
63134 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63135 LatexCommand bibitem
63146 A Document Preparation System.
63154 \begin_layout Bibliography
63155 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63156 LatexCommand bibitem
63166 The \SpecialChar TeX
63174 \begin_layout Bibliography
63175 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63176 LatexCommand bibitem
63182 The \SpecialChar TeX
63184 \begin_inset Newline newline
63188 \begin_inset Flex URL
63191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63193 https://ctan.org/topic
63201 \begin_layout Bibliography
63202 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63203 LatexCommand bibitem
63209 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
63211 \begin_inset Newline newline
63215 \begin_inset Flex URL
63218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63220 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
63228 \begin_layout Bibliography
63229 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63230 LatexCommand bibitem
63237 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63239 name "Documentation"
63240 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
63247 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63251 \begin_inset Newline newline
63255 \begin_inset Flex URL
63258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63260 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
63268 \begin_layout Bibliography
63269 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63270 LatexCommand bibitem
63277 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63279 name "Documentation"
63280 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
63285 how to use the program
63287 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63291 \begin_inset Newline newline
63295 \begin_inset Flex URL
63298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63300 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
63308 \begin_layout Bibliography
63309 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63310 LatexCommand bibitem
63317 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63319 name "Documentation"
63320 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
63325 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63331 \begin_inset Index idx
63336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63339 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63354 \begin_inset Newline newline
63358 \begin_inset Flex URL
63361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63363 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
63371 \begin_layout Bibliography
63372 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63373 LatexCommand bibitem
63380 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63382 name "Documentation"
63383 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
63388 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63394 \begin_inset Index idx
63399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63402 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63417 \begin_inset Newline newline
63421 \begin_inset Flex URL
63424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63426 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
63434 \begin_layout Bibliography
63435 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63436 LatexCommand bibitem
63443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63445 name "Documentation"
63446 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
63456 \begin_inset Newline newline
63460 \begin_inset Flex URL
63463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63465 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
63473 \begin_layout Bibliography
63474 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63475 LatexCommand bibitem
63476 key "makeindex-man"
63482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63485 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
63495 \begin_inset Newline newline
63499 \begin_inset Flex URL
63502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63504 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
63510 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
63514 \begin_layout Bibliography
63516 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
63517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63518 LatexCommand bibitem
63525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63527 name "Documentation"
63528 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
63538 \begin_inset Newline newline
63542 \begin_inset Flex URL
63545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63547 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
63549 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
63561 \begin_layout Bibliography
63562 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63563 LatexCommand bibitem
63570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63572 name "Documentation"
63573 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
63583 \begin_inset Newline newline
63587 \begin_inset Flex URL
63590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63592 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
63600 \begin_layout Bibliography
63601 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63602 LatexCommand bibitem
63609 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63611 name "Documentation"
63612 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
63617 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
63619 \begin_inset Newline newline
63623 \begin_inset Flex URL
63626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63628 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
63636 \begin_layout Bibliography
63637 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63638 LatexCommand bibitem
63645 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63647 name "Documentation"
63648 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
63653 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63659 \begin_inset Index idx
63664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63667 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63682 \begin_inset Newline newline
63686 \begin_inset Flex URL
63689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63691 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
63699 \begin_layout Bibliography
63700 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63701 LatexCommand bibitem
63708 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63710 name "Documentation"
63711 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
63716 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63722 \begin_inset Index idx
63727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63730 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63745 \begin_inset Newline newline
63749 \begin_inset Flex URL
63752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63754 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
63762 \begin_layout Bibliography
63763 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63764 LatexCommand bibitem
63771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63773 name "Documentation"
63774 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
63779 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63785 \begin_inset Index idx
63790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63793 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63808 \begin_inset Newline newline
63812 \begin_inset Flex URL
63815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63817 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
63825 \begin_layout Bibliography
63826 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63827 LatexCommand bibitem
63834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63836 name "Documentation"
63837 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
63842 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63848 \begin_inset Index idx
63853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63856 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63871 \begin_inset Newline newline
63875 \begin_inset Flex URL
63878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63880 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
63888 \begin_layout Bibliography
63889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63890 LatexCommand bibitem
63897 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63899 name "Documentation"
63900 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
63905 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63911 \begin_inset Index idx
63916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63919 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63934 \begin_inset Newline newline
63938 \begin_inset Flex URL
63941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63943 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
63951 \begin_layout Bibliography
63952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63953 LatexCommand bibitem
63960 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63962 name "Documentation"
63963 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
63968 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63974 \begin_inset Index idx
63979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63982 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63997 \begin_inset Newline newline
64001 \begin_inset Flex URL
64004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64006 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
64014 \begin_layout Bibliography
64015 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64016 LatexCommand bibitem
64023 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64025 name "Documentation"
64026 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
64031 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
64037 \begin_inset Index idx
64042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64045 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
64048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64060 \begin_inset Newline newline
64064 \begin_inset Flex URL
64067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64069 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
64077 \begin_layout Bibliography
64078 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64079 LatexCommand bibitem
64086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64088 name "Documentation"
64089 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
64094 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
64100 \begin_inset Index idx
64105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64108 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
64111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64123 \begin_inset Newline newline
64127 \begin_inset Flex URL
64130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64132 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
64140 \begin_layout Bibliography
64141 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64142 LatexCommand bibitem
64149 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64152 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
64157 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64159 \begin_inset Newline newline
64163 \begin_inset Flex URL
64166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64168 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
64176 \begin_layout Bibliography
64177 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64178 LatexCommand bibitem
64185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64188 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
64193 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64195 \begin_inset Newline newline
64199 \begin_inset Flex URL
64202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64204 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
64212 \begin_layout Bibliography
64213 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64214 LatexCommand bibitem
64221 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64224 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
64229 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64230 for Cyrillic languages:
64231 \begin_inset Newline newline
64235 \begin_inset Flex URL
64238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64240 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
64248 \begin_layout Bibliography
64249 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64250 LatexCommand bibitem
64257 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64260 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
64265 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64267 \begin_inset Newline newline
64271 \begin_inset Flex URL
64274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64276 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
64284 \begin_layout Bibliography
64285 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64286 LatexCommand bibitem
64293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64296 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
64301 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64303 \begin_inset Newline newline
64307 \begin_inset Flex URL
64310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64312 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
64320 \begin_layout Bibliography
64321 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64322 LatexCommand bibitem
64329 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64332 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
64337 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64339 \begin_inset Newline newline
64343 \begin_inset Flex URL
64346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64348 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
64356 \begin_layout Standard
64357 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
64364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64392 \begin_inset Note Note
64395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64402 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
64403 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
64411 \begin_layout Standard
64412 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
64413 LatexCommand bibtex
64414 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
64415 options "biblio/alphadin"
64422 \begin_layout Standard
64423 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
64427 \begin_layout Standard
64431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64437 pagedeclaration}[1]{
64440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64447 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
64455 \begin_inset Note Note
64458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64459 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
64461 \begin_inset space ~
64465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
64467 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
64480 \begin_layout Standard
64481 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
64482 LatexCommand printnomenclature
64488 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
64489 LatexCommand printindex